US20190240502A1 - Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy - Google Patents

Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20190240502A1
US20190240502A1 US16/264,444 US201916264444A US2019240502A1 US 20190240502 A1 US20190240502 A1 US 20190240502A1 US 201916264444 A US201916264444 A US 201916264444A US 2019240502 A1 US2019240502 A1 US 2019240502A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
dose
light
coal tar
dressing
hydrogel
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US16/264,444
Inventor
Evan R. Anderson
Adam Martos
Christopher Steven Pell
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Luma Therapeutics Inc
Original Assignee
Luma Therapeutics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Luma Therapeutics Inc filed Critical Luma Therapeutics Inc
Priority to US16/264,444 priority Critical patent/US20190240502A1/en
Publication of US20190240502A1 publication Critical patent/US20190240502A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N5/0613Apparatus adapted for a specific treatment
    • A61N5/0616Skin treatment other than tanning
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/02Adhesive bandages or dressings
    • A61F13/023Adhesive bandages or dressings wound covering film layers without a fluid retention layer
    • A61F13/0233Adhesive bandages or dressings wound covering film layers without a fluid retention layer characterised by the oclusive layer skin contacting layer
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/02Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution from inanimate materials
    • A61K35/04Tars; Bitumens; Mineral oils; Ammonium bituminosulfonate
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/06Ointments; Bases therefor; Other semi-solid forms, e.g. creams, sticks, gels
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06Antipsoriatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F2013/00361Plasters
    • A61F2013/00727Plasters means for wound humidity control
    • A61F2013/00748Plasters means for wound humidity control with hydrocolloids or superabsorbers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F2013/00361Plasters
    • A61F2013/00902Plasters containing means
    • A61F2013/00927Plasters containing means with biological activity, e.g. enzymes for debriding wounds or others, collagen or growth factors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/0626Monitoring, verifying, controlling systems and methods
    • A61N2005/0627Dose monitoring systems and methods
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/0635Radiation therapy using light characterised by the body area to be irradiated
    • A61N2005/0643Applicators, probes irradiating specific body areas in close proximity
    • A61N2005/0645Applicators worn by the patient
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/065Light sources therefor
    • A61N2005/0651Diodes
    • A61N2005/0652Arrays of diodes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/0658Radiation therapy using light characterised by the wavelength of light used
    • A61N2005/0661Radiation therapy using light characterised by the wavelength of light used ultraviolet
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/0664Details
    • A61N2005/0667Filters

Definitions

  • phototherapy methods, compositions and apparatuses including medicaments of coal tar, coal tar extract, dressings including such medicaments, methods of using such medicaments, apparatuses (including devices and systems, including software, hardware and/or firmware) for controlling the application of phototherapy, and phototherapy devices including UV light applicators for treating disorders such as psoriasis that are safe and easy to use, including for home use by a patient.
  • Light when delivered to the body, has been shown to elicit a wide range of therapeutic effects. Specifically, light can be used as a therapeutic agent for various disorders.
  • Light in the Ultraviolet (UV) spectrum, may be used as a treatment for skin disorders such as psoriasis, vitiligo, dermatitis, histotic, purigo, pruritis, etc.
  • UV Ultraviolet
  • Light therapy is often delivered in a doctor's office or at home in chambers that deliver light to the entire body surface or with smaller light sources for delivery of light to focused areas of the body.
  • a trained professional is required to deliver the light to ensure that the patient receives the correct dose of light and that sensitive areas, such as the eyes, are not exposed to the light.
  • the amount of light delivered is based on the amount of time the patient is exposed to light.
  • the light is delivered to the entire body even though the region that requires treatment often composes a fraction of the overall surface area of the body.
  • the patient When receiving this modality of light therapy, the patient must wear protective eyewear to prevent exposure of light to the eyes. If the patient is exposed to more light than intended, cellular damage and/or burns may occur over a large portion of the body, leading to significant discomfort and even medical treatment.
  • Using a focused light solves the issue of light exposure to areas that do not need therapy because the user directs the light to the area where the therapy is needed.
  • therapy is delivered at home and the user controls where the light is being delivered, there is increased risk of overexposure of one area of the body and underexposure of another area.
  • the light can be inadvertently directed towards sensitive areas such as the eyes or genitals.
  • Light therapy may also be combined with topical treatments.
  • coal tar is used as a therapeutic in conjunction with (though typically not at the same time) as phototherapy.
  • phototherapy with UVB has been used with coal tar (the Goeckerman regimen) as well as with anthralin.
  • the Goeckerman regimen uses daily treatments of 3 to 4 weeks on average.
  • the coal tar or anthralin is applied once or twice each day and then washed off before the procedure.
  • Studies indicate that a low-dose (e.g., 1%) coal tar preparation is as effective as a high-dose (6%) preparation.
  • Such regimens are unpleasant, but are still useful for some patients with severe psoriasis, because they can achieve long-term remission (up to 18 months on average).
  • Treatments involving both UVB and coal tar or other topical drugs typically involve the separate application of the UVB and coal tar, in part because it coal tar is messy, odiferous and blocks or absorbs all or nearly all of the delivered UV light. For this reason, coal tar is often applied after administration of the UVB. Unfortunately, bifurcating treatment in this way complicates the treatment, and may further limit the effectiveness.
  • a topical agent such as coal tar may be messy and unpleasant, at least in part because of the odor associated with the agent and the use of oil-based agents (e.g., petroleum) solubilizing the coal tar (or coal tar extract).
  • one or more dressings that may be used with a light therapy (e.g., UV) applicator to hold the applicator at a fixed position (including at a fixed or known distance) from the patient. Described herein are methods and apparatuses that may address these needs.
  • a light therapy e.g., UV
  • the methods and apparatuses, including devices and systems (including software, firmware and hardware) described herein relate to phototherapy for treatment of a skin disorder, and in particular phototherapy apparatuses and methods for treatment of psoriasis. Any of the methods described herein may be implemented in an apparatus.
  • any of these methods and apparatuses may include determining one or more therapeutic doses of UV phototherapy (and in some variations, applying). These dosing methods and apparatuses may be used with any of the UV light applicators and/or dressings described herein.
  • a method and apparatus for delivering phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder may include the calculation of a dose using a remnant dose, and the use of the remnant dose to determine a new dose.
  • a remnant dose is particular relevant when a second or additional dose of UV phototherapy is to be applied within a predetermined window of time (e.g., within 60 hours, within 58 hours, within 56 hours, within 54 hours, within 52 hours, within 50 hours, within 48 hours, within 46 hours, within 40 hours, within 36 hours, within 30 hours, within 24 hours, within 18 hours, etc.) of a previous UV phototherapy dose.
  • the remnant dose accounts for the lingering effects of a prior dose within this predetermined window of time (e.g., 52 hours) on the same area of the skin to which a new dose is being prepared.
  • the new dose may be referred to herein as an additional dose, a second dose or a planned dose.
  • the methods and apparatuses described herein may incorporate remnant doses due to more than one prior dose within the predetermined time period (e.g., two prior doses, three prior doses, etc.).
  • a subsequent dose must account for the residual effects of that previous dose(s) made within this finite window in order to be effective without creating local sensitization of the skin.
  • a subsequent therapeutically effective dose (a planned dose) may account for the residual dose.
  • any of the methods and apparatuses described herein may use the time from the last dose, as well as the prior dose, e.g., an estimate of the prior dose, such as the energy delivered per area to the patient's skin.
  • the prior dose may be estimated (e.g., the value of the energy applied to the same UV light source to treat the skin), calculated, or measured (e.g., at the skin).
  • the methods described herein may refer to the the energy delivered per unit area of light energy (e.g., UV light energy within the 300-320 nm range) delivered as a prior (or “first”) dose or doses of UV radiation energy per area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin.
  • any of the dressings described herein may be used for the application of light energy and the dose may include an estimation of the energy delivered through the dressing; specifically through a window on the dressing that is configured to pass UV light.
  • Any of the methods and apparatuses described herein may account for the passage of light through the dressing, e.g., by including a UV attenuation factor for the dressing.
  • the dressings described herein may hold a UV light source (applicator) a fixed, constant and known distance from the skin and may direct the light through the dressing(s), in addition to allowing for re-application of the UV therapy to the same region of the skin.
  • a UV light source applicator
  • the remnant dose when determining the dose to be applied (particularly when a prior dose was delivered within 52 hours), the remnant dose may be estimated using the time since the prior dose as well as an estimate of the prior dose(s) (e.g., the energy delivered per area, or the power applied to the illuminator for a particular dressing on the body, etc., or equivalent values); a non-linear decay curve may be applied to estimate the remnant dose from the prior dose(s).
  • the non-linear decay curve represents the remnant dose function over time for time less than the predetermined window (e.g., less than 52 hours).
  • the remnant dose is the sum or all prior doses within the window (e.g., ⁇ 52 hours) where each prior dose is the product of the remnant dose function (at the time since the prior dose based on the time the new dose is to be applied) and the prior dose.
  • This remnant dose can then be subtracted from a target dose, which may also be referred to as a therapeutically effective target dose.
  • the target dose may be determined based on the MED for the patient's skin.
  • MED may be determined by estimation (eMED or estimated MED, e.g., based on skin type or other well-known factors), such as using the Fitzpatrick scale, or by empirical measurements (e.g., to determine the threshold dose for redness/pain, etc.).
  • a target does may be a percentage of MED or eMED (such as between about 70% and 100% of MED/eMED) and when the target dose is part of a series of sequential doses, it may also account for photoadaptation, by including a scaling factor that increases over time (e.g., the target dose may be a percentage (e.g., 70%-100%) of MED or eMED plus the photoadaptation, adding, for example between 2%-20% (e.g., 6%) of the MED per each day during the dosing series.
  • a scaling factor that increases over time e.g., the target dose may be a percentage (e.g., 70%-100%) of MED or eMED plus the photoadaptation, adding, for example between 2%-20% (e.g., 6%) of the MED per each day during the dosing series.
  • any of these methods and apparatuses may confirm and/or track the location of the applied dose on a patient's skin.
  • the remnant dose may be specific to a particular region of the patient's skin, and different remnant doses may be estimated at different locations.
  • the methods and apparatus described herein may therefore track, record and apply the locations and timing of doses applied to different skin regions.
  • the use of a remnant dose when determining a second phototherapy dose when the second dose is to be applied within a short predetermined (e.g., 52 hour) time period is quite different from methods for determining a second dose after this predetermined time period in which only include photoadaptation of the patient's skin.
  • the subsequent dose if made within 3-7 days
  • the methods described herein decrease the subsequent doses by an amount based on the residual dose(s), when the subsequent dose is applied within the predetermined time period (e.g., ⁇ 52 hours), although it may also include/account for photoadaptation.
  • a subsequent dose may result in a lower dose being applied in some cases.
  • the target dosing may be based on the estimated or approximated MED for a patient, in which the therapeutically appropriate does is around the MED/eMED.
  • the first dose Dose 1
  • D1 which is some percentage of MED/eMED (e.g., between about 70-100% of MED/eMED)
  • an estimated second target dose Dt
  • D1 plus D1*a photoadaptation percent %, typically between about 2% and 20%
  • the second dose to be delivered may also include a term accounting for the remnant dose.
  • the photoadaptation percent for a patient may be estimated or calculated and may be, e.g., between 1% and 20% (e.g., between 2% and 12%, e.g., 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, etc.).
  • the remnant dose (Dr(x)) is a function of time since the prior dose.
  • Dr(x) Fr(T)*Dt(x ⁇ 1), where T is the time between the new, target, dose and the prior dose and Fr(T) is the remnant dose function over time and Dt(x ⁇ 1) is the prior target dose.
  • the dose to be delivered as an effective dose should be the difference between the target dose, Dt(x), and the remnant dose, Dr(x).
  • the target dose target effective dose
  • the target dose may be the prior effective dose plus an accounting for photoadaptation (e.g. prior dose*photoadaptaion %).
  • a subsequent effective dose within the predetermined remnant window e.g., 52 hours
  • Dt(x ⁇ 1) corresponds to the prior “target dose” (which may be different from the prior delivered delivered dose).
  • dose 1 (D1) is 100 mJ/cm 2 , which may be determined initially to be near the MED/eMED (e.g., 90% of an MED/eMED) for the patient.
  • the second target dose Dt(x) may therefore be 106 mJ/cm 2 , when the dose is to be delivered at 24 hours from the first dose, assuming a photoadaptation percentage of 6%.
  • the target dose, Dt(2) is D1+6%(D1) or 106 mJ/cm 2 .
  • the residual dose should be subtracted from the target dose.
  • the residual dose function indicates that 37% of the prior target dose (in this case, 100 mJ/cm 2 ) should be subtracted from the second target dose.
  • the third remnant dose is the second targeted dose (106 mJ/cm 2 ) times 37%.
  • the remnant dose is calculated off the prior targeted dose, giving a remnant dose for the third dose of 39.2 mJ/cm 2 .
  • this third remnant dose is based on the 2nd target dose and subtracted from the third target dose (e.g., 112.4 mJ/cm 2 ⁇ 39.2 mJ/cm 2 or 73.1 mJ/cm 2 ).
  • the increased target dose due to photoadaptation may be increased at each subsequent dosing (time) by a certain amount, such as 1% (e.g., 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5% ,6%, etc.)
  • 1% e.g., 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5% ,6%, etc.
  • the first photoadaptation for a dose after 24 hours may be 6%
  • the next dose may be increased to 6.06% (a 1% increase)
  • the next does may be increased to 6.12%, etc.
  • a UV phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder
  • the method comprising: delivering a first dose of UV radiation at a first energy per unit area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin; determining a second dose of UV radiation to be delivered to the predetermined location at a second time within 52 hours from the first dose by estimating, in a processor, a remnant dose, based on the first dose and a time since the first dose, and subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose to get the second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than or equal to the first dose; and delivering the second dose to the predetermined location.
  • a method of delivering a UV phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder may include: delivering a first dose of UV radiation at a first energy per unit area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin; determining a second dose of UV radiation to be delivered to the predetermined location at a second time within 52 hours from the first dose by estimating, in a processor, a remnant dose, based on the first energy per unit area and time since the first dose, and a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose, and subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose to get the second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than or equal to the first dose; and communicating the second dose from the processor to a UV light source on the predetermined location; and delivering the second dose to the predetermined location.
  • a method of delivering a UV phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder may include: delivering a first dose of UV radiation at a first energy per unit area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin, through a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent and that comprises a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 10% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel; determining a second dose of UV radiation to be delivered to the predetermined location at a second time within 52 hours from the first dose by estimating, in a processor, a remnant dose, based on the first energy per unit area and time since the first dose, and a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose, and subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose to get the second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than or equal to the first dose; and delivering the second dose to the predetermined location through the phototherapy dressing.
  • the dose may be delivered through a phototherapy dressing that is at least partially UV transparent (in the 300-320 nm range) and may include a coal tar or coal tar extract directly on the dressing.
  • Other medicaments may be used with any of these methods, either in the dressing or otherwise (e.g., orally delivered, etc.).
  • any of these methods may include delivering the first dose, and subsequent dose(s), through a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent and that comprises a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 10% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel.
  • delivering the dose may comprises delivering the first dose from a UV light source mounted a predetermined distance from the subject's skin.
  • delivering the first dose may comprise delivering the first dose from a UV light source positioned a predetermined distance from the subject's skin and further wherein the processor is in communication with the UV light source.
  • any of the methods described herein may include attaching a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent and comprises a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 10% (e.g., between 0.05% and 7.5%, between 0.1% and 5%, etc.) coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel over the predetermined location on the subject's skin and delivering the first and second dose through the phototherapy dressing.
  • a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent and comprises a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 10% (e.g., between 0.05% and 7.5%, between 0.1% and 5%, etc.) coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel over the predetermined location on the subject's skin and delivering the first and second dose through the phototherapy dressing.
  • Determining the second dose may comprise determining the the remnant dose based on a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose. Determining the second dose may comprise estimating the remnant dose based on the first energy per unit area of the first dose as well as the time since the first dose. Determining the second dose may comprise estimating the a remnant dose based on the first energy per unit area of the first dose as well as the time since the first dose, and a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose.
  • Determining the second dose may comprise subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than the first dose and is a product of the first dose and a percentage of photoadaptation of the skin, wherein the percentage of photoadaptation is between, e.g., 1% and 20% (e.g., 2% and 12%, 4% and 10%, etc.).
  • Any of the method described herein may also include determining the remnant dose by multiplying the first dose by a remnant dose multiplier based on the time since the first dose.
  • the amount of the dose being calculated may account for the UV transmission/absorption of any dressing through which the light is being applied.
  • the first dose may be determined based on the UV light emitted a UV light source delivering light to the skin and the amount of light absorbed by the dressing.
  • the estimate of the dose to be applied through the dressing may account for the UV energy lost through the dressing (e.g., by multiplying by a factor corresponding to the transmissivity/absorption of the dressing, such as a Dressing attenuation %, between 30% and 95%, for example).
  • the dressing described herein may be referred to as UV transparent (or semi-transparent) patches, bandages, or dressings.
  • these dressings may include a coal tar or coal tar extract.
  • coal tar and coal tar extract are not UV transparent. Even small amounts of coal tar or coal tar extract (e.g., 0.025% or more) may inhibit or block most or all of the UV transmission in the therapeutic range of 300-320 nm.
  • bandages including coal tar even in a hydrogel, may not be UV transparent, or may lose their UV transparency as the coal tar or coal tar extract diffuses into the dressing and/or interacts with one or more dressing component, such as the hydrogel and any otherwise UV transparent layers.
  • dressings that may include coal tar/coal tar extract formulations and arrangements that may have enhanced UV transmission properties and longer-term stability, allowing their storage (shelf-life) and longer term usage.
  • a hydrogel into which a coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged (e.g., as globules/microglobules, typically between 10-100 ⁇ m diameter, distributed throughout the hydrogel, and/or arranged in clusters, columns, rows, lines, etc.).
  • the coal tar may be held within the hydrogel, and may be limited from dissolving or absorbing (or solubilizing) into the hydrogel by including an agent (e.g., such as a high concentration of MgCl 2 without sorbitol).
  • the hydrogel may be formed and maintained in the dressing in a manner to prevent shrinking/pulling of the dressing in the plane of the hydrogel, particularly as the hydrogel dries (e.g., during use).
  • any of these apparatuses e.g., dressings
  • materials commonly used are not suitable for use in the dressings described herein having a hydrogel with coal tar and/or coal tar extract, either because they are not sufficiently UV transparent or because their UV transparency (e.g., within the range of 300-320 nm) changes over time with exposure to the other components of the dressing and/or the body.
  • films of LDPE Low-density polyethylene
  • PU polyurethane
  • PE polyethylene
  • PET Polyethylene terephthalate
  • PVC Polyvinyl chloride
  • most Silicones LLDPE (Linear low-density polyethylene), TPU (Thermoplastic polyurethane), EVA (Ethylene-vinyl acetate), and many rubber blends, and blends of any of these materials lose their UV transmissivity after exposer to many common environmental compounds.
  • UV transparent, occlusive, inert layers that may be used to form part of the UV transparent region of a dressing to maintain UV transparency and low-odor of the dressing.
  • These materials may be elastic or relatively stiff (and may be creased, or may include flexing, bent, creased, fan-folded, folded, etc.) regions to prevent them to flex as they are applied to body surfaces).
  • these materials are resistant to acids, bases, volatile organic compounds (VOCs), and in particular coal tar/coal tar extract.
  • Inert may refer to chemically inert materials, and may also specifically refer to materials that do not substantially change their UV transparency in response to prolonged (e.g., 100 hours or more) of exposure to acids, bases, and VOCs, including coal tar/coal tar extracts.
  • materials including in particular some fluoropolymers/fluorocarbons, such as ETFE (Ethylene tetrafluoroethylene, particularly “Tefzel”) which are thin (e.g., have a thickness less than about 0.005 inches) and are UV clear.
  • ETFE Ethylene tetrafluoroethylene, particularly “Tefzel”
  • UV transparent dressings for treating a skin disorder by light therapy.
  • These dressing may include: a base configured to be worn on the skin, the base region having an adhesive bottom surface, the base further forming a window region; a hydrogel layer extending across the window region; a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract within the hydrogel, wherein the micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact are present at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel; a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the base; and a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window region in contact with the hydrogel layer, wherein the vapor occlusive barrier comprises a material that is chemically compatible with a compatible compounds, and does not change its UV transparency by more than 10% when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds; further wherein the the dressing passes greater than 20% of
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be a thin film; in some variations the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier comprises a coating.
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be any appropriate material that is UV transparent to greater than 75% (e.g., greater than 80%, greater than 85%, greater than 90%, etc.) and does not change its UV transparency over time with exposure to acids, bases or VOCs (including coal tar).
  • the barrier may be formed of a fluoropolymer.
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may comprise ethylene tetrafluoroethylene (ETFE).
  • the UV transparent layer does not change its UV transparency by more than 5% when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds; in some variations, the UV transparent layer does not change its UV transparency by more than 2% when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds.
  • the UV transparent layer may not change its UV transparency by more than 10% (e.g., 7.5%, 5%, etc.) when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: acetylsalicylic acid, ascorbic acid, aluminum hydroxide, salicylic acid, ammonium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, sodium hyphochlorite, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, benzene, formaldehyde, chloroflourocarbons, alcohols, coal tar, creosotes, ammonia nitrate, uric acid, urocanic acid, hydrogen peroxide, naptholene, sulfates, phenols, p-amino benzoic acid, and pyridoxine.
  • the compatible compounds comprises: acetylsalicylic acid, ascorbic acid, aluminum hydroxide, salicylic acid, ammonium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, sodium hyphochlorite, sodium carbonate
  • the dressing may pass 30% or more (e.g., 35% or more, 40% or more, 45% or more, 50% or more, 55% or more, 60% or more, 65% or more, 70% or more, 75% or more, etc.) of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm through the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier and hydrogel layer.
  • the coal tar e.g., globules or micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact
  • the hydrogel may be coupled to the base in a manner that prevents the hydrogel from contracting in the plane of the hydrogel (e.g. in the x, y plane) and thickening in the z plane.
  • the hydrogel may be mechanically secured and prevented from contracting in the x, y plane.
  • the scrim layer is configured as a border extending into and beyond an outer perimeter of the hydrogel layer; the scrim layer may be configured to prevent the hydrogel from contracting.
  • the scrim layer may extend from the hydrogel and may be configured to prevent contraction of the hydrogel in a plane of the hydrogel.
  • any of the dressing described herein may be configured to attach or couple to a UV light source (e.g. holding the light source in a fixed position relative to the dressing and therefore the patient's skin).
  • the dressing may include one or more magnetic or mechanical contacts on the base configured to couple with a UV light source.
  • the window region of the dressing may be any appropriate size and shape.
  • the window may be square, rectangular, triangular, oval, round, donut-shaped, etc.
  • the window region may have an area of between about 0.25 and 49 square inches.
  • coal tar/coal tar extract may be arranged in a plurality of columns or lines within the hydrogel.
  • coal tar may refer to coal tar or coal tar extract or a combination of both; similarly “coal tar or coal tar extract” may include combinations of coal tar and coal tar extract.
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be configured to allow for articulation or stretching over a bending anatomy; for example, the barrier may include one or more folds allowing the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier to stretch without permanent deformation.
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may have any appropriate thickness.
  • the barrier may have a thickness of less than 0.005 inches.
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may transmit 90% or more UV light between 300-320 nm.
  • a UV transparent dressing for treating a skin disorder by light therapy may include: a base configured to be worn on the skin, the base region having an adhesive bottom surface, the base further forming a window region; a hydrogel layer extending across the window region; a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract within the hydrogel, wherein the micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact are present at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel; a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the base; and a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window region in contact with the hydrogel layer, wherein the vapor occlusive barrier comprises a fluoropolymer material that is chemically compatible with a compatible compound, and does not change its UV transparency by more than 5% when exposed to the compatible compound after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compound comprises: acetylsalicylic acid, ascorbic acid, aluminum hydroxide,
  • a UV transparent dressing for treating a skin disorder by light therapy may include: a base configured to be worn on the skin, the base region having an adhesive bottom surface, the base further forming a window region, and the base region comprising a magnetic or mechanical contact configured to couple with a UV light source; a hydrogel layer extending across the window region; a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract within the hydrogel, wherein the micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact are present at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel; a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the base; and a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window region in contact with the hydrogel layer, wherein the vapor occlusive barrier comprises a fluoropolymer material that is chemically compatible with a compatible compound, and does not change its UV transparency by more than 5% when exposed to the compatible compound after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compound comprises: ace
  • any of the apparatuses described herein may be configured to enhance the stability of the dressings described herein, and in particular their UV transmissivity.
  • the hydrogels described herein include between 0.025% and 10% of coal tar. If the coal tar were (even at the 0.025%) dissolved into the hydrogel, the coal tar would occlude virtually all of the UV light within the 300-320 nm range. As previously described by the inventors in U.S. Pat. No.
  • a hydrogel in which the coal tar is present in globules (e.g., microglobules) rather than dissolved may instead be made sufficiently (e.g., 20% or more, 30% or more, 40% or more, 50% or more, etc.) UV transmissive.
  • these globules or clusters may continue to dissolve into the hydrogel, a process which may accelerate on exposure to air and in contact with a patient's skin.
  • hydrogels treated with coal tar may have a much longer shelf-life and patient use life (e.g., extending from days to months or more).
  • the amount of MgCl 2 may be high, for example, 5% or more, 6% or more 7% or more 8% or more, 9% or more, 10% or more, 12% or more, 15% or more, 17% or more, 20% or more, 25% or more, 30% or more, 35% or more, 40% or more, 50% or more, etc. Any of these variations may also include calcium (e.g., CaCl 2 ). The amount of calcium may be less (e.g., 10 mM) up to equimolar amounts of CaCl 2 compared to MgCl 2 .
  • phototherapy dressings that are highly UV transparent, the dressing comprising: a support body having a window; a medicament extending across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel, wherein the suspension comprises a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract, further wherein the medicament is substantially free of sorbitol and comprises 5% or more MgCl 2 by weight; wherein the medicament occludes less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • the amount of MgCl 2 may be greater than 5% (e.g., 10% or more, 15% or more, etc.).
  • the MgCl 2 may be present in the hydrogel, or the hydrogel may be stored and/or soaked in a solution of high MgCl 2 . Any of these dressings may occlude less than 70% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm (e.g., less than 60% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm, etc.).
  • the coal tar e.g., micro-globules of coal tar and/or coal tar exact
  • any of the dressings described herein may have an adhesive on the phototherapy dressing, and/or a hydrocolloid perimeter adjacent to the hydrogel, and/or a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window in contact with the medicament, as described above.
  • the support body may be made of polyurethane.
  • the support body may comprise a thin layer of polymeric material having a thickness of less than 0.005 inches.
  • the hydrogel may be between 0.01 inches to 0.08 inches thick.
  • the the phototherapy dressing may have a thickness of less than 0.2 inches.
  • the dressing may also include a scrim material connecting the medicament to the support body.
  • the scrim material may extend from the hydrogel and connect the medicament to the support body, wherein the scrim is configured to prevent contraction of the hydrogel in a plane of the hydrogel.
  • any of the dressing described herein may include an identifier that may be used (e.g., by the UV light source) to uniquely identify the dressing and the identifier may be associated with a particular region of the patient's skin, so that repeating UV light therapy may be applied in the same location.
  • a phototherapy dressing may have a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing and/or the region of a patient's body.
  • a phototherapy dressing may include a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing, wherein the unique identifier is one or more of: an RFID tag, an optical code, a magnetic signature, or an alphanumeric code, a capacitance signature and a resistive signature.
  • the hydrogel may be primarily water, minus the percentage (e.g., by weigh) of coal tar and/or MgCl 2 .
  • the hydrogel portion may comprise less than 85% water.
  • a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent may include: a support body having a window; a medicament extending across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel, wherein the suspension comprises a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract, further wherein the medicament is substantially free of sorbitol and comprises 10% or more MgCl2 by weight; wherein the medicament occludes less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • the dressings described herein may made to increase their UV transmittance, even in the presence of 0.025% to 10% coal tar within the hydrogel (which would normally, when dissolved, occlude virtually all of the UV light through the hydrogel, is to arranged the coal tar or coal tar extract to provide regions in which the hydrogel is relatively free of coal tar (including coal tar clusters or microclusters.
  • the coal tar may be arranged in small clusters grouped into columns (e.g., perpendicular to the plane of the hydrogel), lines (e.g., grid or comparable patterns) within the hydrogel, so that adjacent clusters/lines/etc.
  • coal tar may occlude UV light (e.g., >95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, etc.); regions outside of these clusters, columns, lines, etc. may be relative free of coal tar (including dissolved coal tar) and may therefore pass the majority of UV light (e.g., may pass >95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 60%, 50%, etc.)
  • the hydrogel may transmit greater than 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, etc.
  • phototherapy dressings that are highly UV transparent, the dressing comprising: a support body having a window; a medicament extending in a plane across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar in the hydrogel, wherein the coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged in within the hydrogel to form alternating first regions that occlude more than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm and second regions that occlude less than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm across the plane of the medicament; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • the spacing between the UV occluding regions of coal tar and the non-UV occluding regions may be any appropriate distance, including, for example, greater than 0 1 mm, greater than 0.2 mm, greater than 0.3 mm, greater than 0.4 mm, greater than 0 5 mm, greater than lmm, greater than 1.2 mm, greater than 1.5 mm, greater than 1.7 mm, greater than 2 mm, etc. and/or may be less than 5 cm, less than 4 cm, less than 3.5 cm, less than 3 cm, less than 2.5 cm less than 2 cm, less than 1.5 cm, less than 1 cm, etc.
  • the first regions and the second regions may be separated in the plane of the medicament by between about 1 mm and about 2000 mm (in the plane of the medicament).
  • the first regions and the second regions may be separated in the plane of the medicament by a function of the surface area of the adjacent UV occluding regions (e.g., the first and second regions); for example the separation between the two regions may be approximately the square root of the combined surface area of adjacent regions, or a multiple (e.g., 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,1.5, etc.) of this.
  • the first regions may comprise columns of coal tar or coal tar extract that extend perpendicular to the plane of the medicament. In some variations, the first regions comprise lines of coal tar or coal tar extending in the plane of the medicament. In some variations, the first regions comprise clusters of coal tar or coal tar extract. As mentioned above, overall, the medicament may occlude less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body (e.g., less than 75%, less than 70%, less than 65%, less than 60%, less than 55%, less than 50%, etc.).
  • the medicament may be substantially free of surfactants/detergents, such as glycerol and/or sorbitol and may comprise 5% or more MgCl 2 (e.g., 7.5% or more, 10% or more, 15% or more, etc.).
  • surfactants/detergents such as glycerol and/or sorbitol
  • MgCl 2 e.g., 7.5% or more, 10% or more, 15% or more, etc.
  • the phototherapy dressing may have a hydrocolloid perimeter adjacent to the medicament, and/or a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window in contact with the medicament.
  • phototherapy dressing that are highly UV transparent and include: a support body having a window; a medicament extending in a plane across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar extract in the hydrogel, wherein the coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged in a plurality of columns or lines within the hydrogel, (e.g., wherein the columns or lines are separated by between about 0.1 mm and about 3 cm); and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • the phototherapy dressing of claim 21 wherein the arrangement of coal tar or coat tar extract forms alternating regions that occlude more than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm and regions that occlude less than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm across the plane of the medicament.
  • the columns or lines may be separated by 1 mm or more (e.g., between 0.1 mm and 3 cm, between 0.5 mm and about 2 cm, between about 1 mm and 1.5 cm, etc.).
  • the coal tar or coal tar extract may be arranged in columns perpendicular to the plane of the medicament, and/or arranged in lines extending in the plane of the medicament.
  • phototherapy dressings that are highly UV transparent, the dressings having: a support body having a window; a medicament extending in a plane across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar in the hydrogel, wherein the coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged in a plurality of columns or lines within the hydrogel; wherein, on average, the medicament occludes less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of an image of coal tar (e.g., globules of coal tar) suspended in a hydrogel patch.
  • coal tar e.g., globules of coal tar
  • FIGS. 2A-2B illustrates one example of a reservoir matrix for delivery of a medicament through a thin film delivery layer.
  • FIGS. 2C and 2D illustrate examples of hydrogels including clusters or lines of coal tar having areas of UV transmissivity (e.g., >40%, >50%, >60%, >70%, >80%, >90%, etc.) UV transmissive for 300-320 nm, alternating with areas of non-transmissivity (e.g., ⁇ 20%, ⁇ 10%, ⁇ 5%, ⁇ 1%, etc.).
  • areas of UV transmissivity e.g., >40%, >50%, >60%, >70%, >80%, >90%, etc.
  • UV transmissive for 300-320 nm, alternating with areas of non-transmissivity (e.g., ⁇ 20%, ⁇ 10%, ⁇ 5%, ⁇ 1%, etc.).
  • FIG. 3 shows an occlusive dressing for use with a light system that contains light guides.
  • FIGS. 4A and 4B show examples of island dressings with a removable and replaceable center.
  • FIG. 5 schematically illustrates a method for delivering a medicament, occlusive dressing and therapeutic light.
  • FIG. 6 schematically illustrates one example of an algorithm for calculating dose of therapeutic energy.
  • FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate examples of devices for directly measuring skin characteristics.
  • FIG. 8A is an array of LEDs with multiple center wavelengths.
  • FIG. 8B is a graph showing a relationship for dosing with an LED or array of LEDs.
  • FIGS. 9A-9C illustrates the use of reflectors with any of the LEDs/LED arrays described herein.
  • FIGS. 10 and 11 illustrate examples of a non-odor emitting occlusive dressing with non-occlusive thin film border (e.g., reduced odor/odor-free dressing).
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B illustrate examples devices for delivery of a therapeutic agent to the scalp, fingers, knuckles or hands of a patient (shown here as hand/glove embodiments, though the principle of operation described herein may be generalized to other body regions).
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B show systems for locating treatment location on a body with an array of LEDs, temporary wear patch and transducers.
  • FIG. 14 schematically illustrates one method by which a medicament may be mixed within a base.
  • FIG. 15 shows an example of an occlusive dressing with layers including a layer of a hydrogel containing a medicament for treatment of a skin condition.
  • the medicament is arranged in vertical columns with in the hydrogel.
  • FIG. 16 is an example of a dressing in which a coal tar hydrocolloid is placed in an equally distributed patter on the patch.
  • FIGS. 17A-17K illustrates user interfaces for one example of an application software for operating a light therapy apparatus (device, system, etc.) as described herein, configured to be run on a user's smartphone and wirelessly control a light source/applicator.
  • a light therapy apparatus device, system, etc.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates one method by which UV index and a location is fed into a controller for the application of light therapy (e.g., which may be hardware, software or firmware, e.g., running on a personal computing device such as a tablet, smartphone, etc.) to determine the time of light exposure and/or automatically control the delivery of light therapy.
  • light therapy e.g., which may be hardware, software or firmware, e.g., running on a personal computing device such as a tablet, smartphone, etc.
  • FIG. 19A shows another example of a dressing as described herein, including coal tar globules suspended in the hydrogel patch.
  • FIG. 19B illustrates another example of a dressing including a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier (shown as Tefzel) over the medicament (e.g., hydrogel), shown in an exploded view in FIG. 19B .
  • a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier shown as Tefzel
  • the medicament e.g., hydrogel
  • FIG. 19C illustrates a perspective view of the dressing of FIG. 19B .
  • FIG. 20 is another example of a dressing as described herein, in which the medicament is kept separated from the hydrogel portion by a removable barrier to be removed by the user before or shortly after applying. Removing the barrier essentially combines the medicament with the hydrogel in a predictable manner
  • FIG. 21 shows one example of a method of manufacturing a dressing.
  • the diagram illustrates a process where ferromagnetic coal tar pillars (columns) are created using electromagnets in combination with mold wells filled with the ferromagnetic coal tar.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a process by which coal tar and a hydrocolloid may be mixed with a gelling hydrocolloid and laid down on the dressing with a spray.
  • FIG. 23 show an example of a method of using a viscous hydrogel with ferromagnetic coal tar suspension to magnetically displace the coal tar during light therapy.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an example of an apparatus (e.g., dressing) in which a viscous hydrogel with coal tar suspension is mechanically displaced from a treatment region within the dressing prior to the application of light therapy.
  • a viscous hydrogel with coal tar suspension is mechanically displaced from a treatment region within the dressing prior to the application of light therapy.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates another example of an apparatus in which the medicament (e.g., coal tar) solution is mechanically displaced, in this example by the light applicator, to apply the light energy.
  • the medicament e.g., coal tar
  • FIG. 26 shows a first example of a configuration for detecting (e.g., magnetically) contact between a light therapy applicator (e.g., light) and a dressing (e.g., patch).
  • a light therapy applicator e.g., light
  • a dressing e.g., patch
  • FIG. 27 is another example of a configuration of a dressing and light therapy applicator that can detect contact between the two when the light therapy applicator is coupled to the dressing.
  • FIG. 28 is another example of a configuration for detecting contact between a light therapy applicator and a dressing (via an optical sensor).
  • FIG. 29 illustrates another example of a configuration for detecting contact between a light therapy applicator and a dressing (via an infra-red proximity sensor).
  • FIG. 30 show an example of a method of determining an applying a light therapy (phototherapy) dose as described herein; this method may be preferably implemented using an apparatus such as one or more of the systems described herein.
  • FIG. 31 is a detailed description of a method of determining and applying a dose of energy.
  • FIG. 32 is a graph illustrating a continuous non-linear function calculating percentage of last dose based on hours from last dose.
  • FIG. 33 is a graph showing a continuous non-linear function by which remnant dose may be calculated.
  • FIG. 34 is a flow diagram illustrating one method of determining a minimal erythemal dose (MED), rate photoadaptation and photoadaptation limit.
  • MED minimal erythemal dose
  • FIG. 35 is a graph showing relative contribution erythema from monochromatic light source (adapted from Anders, Photochemistry and Biology, Vol 61, No. 2, pp 200-205, 1995).
  • FIG. 36 shows a sample distribution of LEDs at 2 different wavelengths in a single light source.
  • FIG. 37 is a table illustrating one method of determining a relative contribution from LEDs to MED at different wavelengths.
  • FIGS. 38A-38G illustrate user for one example of an application software for operating a light therapy apparatus (device, system, etc.) as described herein, tracking doses applied across different lesions, at different treatment times/dates.
  • FIG. 39 is a graph illustrating the effect of contraction of the hydrogel on UV transmittance.
  • described herein are methods, compositions, and apparatuses (e.g., systems and devices) for phototherapy.
  • phototherapy dressings e.g., phototherapy UV light applicators (sources), and methods of using them to treat skin disorders such as psoriasis.
  • medicaments including gels (and particularly hydrogels) having a suspension coal tar or car tar extract, wherein the coal tar extract is between 0.025% and 10% and the sizes of the particles (globules) distributed through the gel are appropriately sized and/or distributed to permit a substantial amount of UV light through the medicament and/or a dressing including the medicament.
  • a medicament may include a suspension of a hydrophobic substance in a hydrophilic base with viscosity greater than water that can transmit light with an absorbance is less than 0.31. The light being absorbed may be in the wavelength range of 300-320 nm.
  • the hydrophobic substance may be a crude coal tar or crude coal tar distillate.
  • medicaments that are light blocking and mixed in a base that does not block light such that: the medicament is hydrophobic or hydrophilic and the base is the opposite, the medicament is 10% or less of the total volume, the amount of medicament dissolved in the base is less than the amount of medicament that is suspended or emulsified in the base, the mixture has a viscosity greater than water at skin temperature, the mixture of the medicament and the base blocks less that if the medicament was fully dissolved in the base and the mixture is a homogenous such that a loss of base from the mixture results in a proportional loss in the medicament.
  • a medicament that is light blocking may be mixed in a base that does not block light such that: the medicament is hydrophobic or hydrophilic and the base is the opposite, the medicament may be 10% or less of the total volume, the amount of medicament dissolved in the base is less than the amount of medicament that is suspended or emulsified in the base, the mixture is a solid or semisolid, transfer of the medicament out of the base occurs at least partially through the dissolved medicament in the base, when the medicament is transferred out of the base, more medicament is dissolved into the base, keeping the % of a dissolved medicament constant and the mixture of the medicament and the base blocks less that if the medicament was fully dissolved.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates one embodiment of a dressing for use with a phototherapy system or on its own for delivery a medicament.
  • the dressing is preferably used in concert with a therapeutic energy-delivering device, but it may alternatively be used independently for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise.
  • the base may contain a crude coal tar or a distillate of coal tar made to 0.025%-10% w/w (of which less than 0.025-0.1% is dissolved into the base).
  • coal tar in other embodiments it is coal tar, coal tar extract or a mixture of coal tar and coal tar extract, and/or one or more of: corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy.
  • the medicament may be a combination of medicaments.
  • the partition coefficient of the hydrogel and medicament phase may be adjusted by adding surfactants such as Oleth-3, Laureth-4, Di-Isopropyl Adipate, FINSOLV-TN, Isopropyl Myristate, or any other substance, synthetic or natural, that would change the solubility of medicament in the two phases, such as PVA.
  • the base contains a uniform density of coal tar globules throughout, while in other embodiments the globules may be distributed in vertical columns, or may be concentrated at different heights within the gels, or oriented in patterns to maximize the penetration of UVB light and the efficiency of coal tar delivery to skin.
  • the base is composed of 40-99.9% water.
  • the base may contain 0.1%-60% salts, including magnesium, calcium, sodium, or chloride salts, or hydrophilic substances such as wax monoesters, triglycerides, fatty acids, or squalenes. These can be added to the gel components prior to gelation, or after gelation by a diffusion process, where the additives are applied directly onto the gel, or diffused into the gel with another carrier.
  • the base may contain 0.1%-10% water absorbing substances such as Polyacrylic Acid, Carbomer, Gelatin, Cellulose or Dextran. These can be added to the gel components prior to gelation, or after gelation by a diffusion process.
  • the base may be hydrophilic, with a viscosity greater than that of water at skin temperature.
  • Medicament may be seeded into the base by either mechanical agitation, stirring, ultrasonic waves, vibrations, spraying the medicament into the solution, injecting the medicament into the solution.
  • the globules of medicament may be of varying diameters, or they may be of uniform diameters.
  • the base may be between 0.001 and 0.100′′ thick.
  • the medicament in the medicament layer may be light blocking of varying thickness and configured to have areas of zero thickness that allow light to pass
  • the diffusion layer may be skin contacting when worn and entirely between the skin and the medicament layer
  • the medicament may be transferred from the medicament layer and into the diffusion layer by dissolving in amount less than 0.5% of the diffusion layer and the amount of medicament in the medicament layer may be greater than the amount of medicament that is transferred to the skin during 7 days of wear.
  • a dressing may contain an absorbent material such as a fabric, thread, pad or pellets, soaked in a medicament where the medicament contained in the absorbent material is isolated from part of the dressing material.
  • the dressing may be partially transmissive to light where non-transmissive parts are oriented and or distributed to minimize blocking surface area in the direction of light penetration over the treatment area such as vertical columns, a thread grid, a fabric border or distributed pellets.
  • the coal tar/coal tar extract may be arranged in lines, columns or clusters so that an alternating pattern of UV occluded/UV un-occluded regions is formed.
  • These clusters/lines/columns may be typically separated by a maximum distance (e.g., 0.1 cm, 0.2 cm, 0.3 cm, 0.4 cm, 0.5 cm, 1 cm, 1.5 cm, 2 cm, 2.5 cm, 3 cm, 3.5 cm, 4 cm, 4.5 cm, 5 cm, etc.) which may allow release of the coal tar from the gel onto the skin for adequate coverage, but may be sufficiently separated so that the coal tar does not dissolve into the UV un-occluded regions over time and prevent UV light from passing.
  • the apparatus including the hydrogel
  • FIGS. 2A-2B illustrates an embodiment of the dressing which incorporates the medicament on a reservoir matrix and includes a skin contacting delivery layer that aids the transfer of medicament from the reservoir matrix to the skin surface.
  • the coal tar matrix is a grid pattern ( FIG. 2B ), with different thicknesses at varying points on the dressing cross-section, resulting in areas of the cross section which are not covered by the grid.
  • the grid may be configured in different shapes: square, circular, triangular, a combination thereof.
  • the grid may be configured to shift position over the course of wear.
  • the grid may be configured to degrade over the course of wear due to pH, interaction with skin fluids, temperature, time, or exposure to UV light.
  • the matrix may be configured to change color or form over the course of wear in order to indicate the appropriate time for a dressing change or to confirm exposure to UV light.
  • the matrix is configured to minimize its footprint on the skin surface area by being arranged in vertical columns that span the full thickness of the gel.
  • the matrix can be composed of one interconnected network, or may consist of individual globules.
  • the matrix may be impregnated with coal tar, a coal tar distillate, or a combination of a coal tar and a carrier that facilitates the transfer of the coal tar through the delivery layer and/or skin.
  • the matrix is impregnated with coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy.
  • the matrix may be in direct contact with the deliver layer, or may be separated by a thin layer of liquid that facilitates the transfer of coal tar from the matrix into the delivery layer.
  • Materials for the diffusion layer may be composed of a hydrogel, low or high durometer silicone, urethane, other flexible polymers, a hydrocolloid, or a combination of one or more of these materials, and may contain a surfactant or oil or alcohol or silicone that alter the solubility of coal tar in the diffusion layer.
  • the matrix consists of material with no coal tar solubility, or very minimal coal tar solubility.
  • the solubility of the coal tar in the delivery layer and the thickness of that layer may be configured in such a way that the UVB transmission through the delivery layer is >30%.
  • the grid of coal tar is formed by soaking a matrix of cellulose to act as a reservoir for coal tar (crude coal tar, CCT); in direct contact with the hydrogel, the matric may replace the dissolved coal tar as it is delivered form the hydrogel to the skin. This may allow a constant rate of delivery of coal tar to the skin and also allow a high UV transmissivity.
  • the matrix may be an inner filler that does not absorb surfactants or CCT.
  • the cellule may directly contact the delivery layer. Any pattern (not limited to a grid) may be used.
  • the release onto the skin may be a function of the (adjustable) thickness and CCT concentration.
  • the coal tar may be injected or inserted or co-formed into the hydrogel (e.g., using a needle or other injection means), without the need for a separate matrix.
  • hydrogel may be applied prior to or during setting over a frozen pattern of coal tar.
  • an occlusive dressing with a medicament may contain portions with variable transmissivity of light (for example a portion may be only an occlusive thin film) where the portions line up with light guides on a light source.
  • the light guides may initially transmit less light than the hydrogel, then, as the hydrogel absorbs skin exudates, the light guides transmit more than the hydrogel.
  • FIGS. 2C and 2D illustrate other patterns of coal-tar within a hydrogel.
  • FIG. 2C shows clusters of coal tar (dark spots), while FIG. 2D shows lines within the hydrogel.
  • the clear regions around the darker spots/lines may be UV transmissive (e.g., >80% UV transmission through the hydrogel), while the darker lines/spots may be non-transmissive (e.g., ⁇ 80% UV transmission).
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an embodiment of the dressing 307 that may contain self-contained portions (labeled Non Medicament Portions 303 ) that may be composed of a different material than the hydrogel dressing itself, and are dispersed between the medicament portions 301 .
  • These self-contained portions are arranged to offer pathways for UV light (from LEDs 309 ) to travel the thickness of the gel and are generally perpendicular to the surface of the dressing.
  • These portions maybe composed of thin films, plastics, hydrogels, hollow tubes, silicones, urethanes, or any other material that does not change in UVB transmission when exposed to skin 305 solutions, including perspiration or sebum, or when exposed to the medicament within the base, or the base material.
  • these portions may be completely empty as well.
  • the non-medicament portions may be configured to cover up to 50% of the cross-sectional area of the base. In alternative embodiments, the non-medicament portions may be configured to cover 10-90% of the base.
  • the self-contained portions only go partially through the thickness of the dressing so that there is a continuous surface of hydrogel at the bottom of the dressing.
  • the dressing is occlusive to gases and vapors and works with an array of LED lights that deliver, in the preferred embodiment, ultraviolet light. In alternative embodiments, blue light, visible light or infrared light is output by the LEDs.
  • an island dressing may include a middle section of a gel or colloid that can be easily removed from the outer edge thin film during treatment and then put back down via one or more of: magnets for attachment; hook-and-latch (e.g., Velcro) for attachment; reusable adhesive for attachment.
  • magnets for attachment e.g., magnets for attachment
  • hook-and-latch e.g., Velcro
  • FIGS. 4A and 4B illustrate one embodiment of a dressing for use with a phototherapy system or on its own for delivery a medicament.
  • the dressing is preferably used in concert with a therapeutic energy-delivering device, but it may alternatively be used independently for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise.
  • the therapeutic energy may UV light, ultrasound, infrared light, blue light, or some other energy source.
  • the dressing may function to treat a condition such as a skin disorder or disease.
  • the center is removable from the semi-removable base which is attached to the skin. The removable center is meant to be removed any time there is delivery of therapeutic energy or any other time needed.
  • the semi-removable base is meant to contain and adhesive layer for attaching to the skin for extended wear of 1 hour to 28 days.
  • the removable center attaches to the semi-removable base through magnets.
  • the removable center attaches to the semi-removable base through Velcro.
  • Other ways to attach the removable center to the semi-removable base include adhesives, hot wax, static charge, mechanical snap, latch, slide, press fit, detent or any other type of attachment method.
  • the removable center contains a hydrogel that contacts the skin directly when attached to the semi-removable base.
  • the center contains a low or high durometer silicone, urethane, other flexible polymers, a hydrocolloid, or a combination of one or more of these materials.
  • the thin film is what connects the hydrogel to the attachment method and extends beyond the center section.
  • the outer rim may be energy or UV blocking, or may allow for UV transmission around the treatment area to condition the skin for future dressing placements that may not exactly match the location of the previous dressing.
  • the island dressing may be configured so that the hydrogel sinks into the base, in order to compensate for volume loss of the hydrogel during use.
  • the hydrogel contains a medicament that may be transferred to the skin through the removable center.
  • the medicament is coal tar or coal tar distillate while in other embodiments it is coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy.
  • the dressing shown in FIGS. 4A-4B may incorporate any of the features of the dressings described herein.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates two methods ( 13 , 14 ) for delivery of light, occlusion and a medicament to the skin.
  • the medicament is coal tar or coal tar distillate while in other embodiments it is coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy.
  • the first method involves applying the medicament to the skin and then occluding the medicament with a dressing.
  • the dressing could be a low or high durometer silicone, urethane, other flexible polymers, a hydrocolloid, or a combination of one or more of these materials.
  • the occlusive dressing may contain an adhesive for attachment to the skin or may wrap around the patient and attach to itself.
  • the attachment method may be an adhesives, hot wax, static charge, mechanical snap, latch, slide, press fit, or any other type of attachment method.
  • the occlusion and medicament is left on the skin for 3 days but in other embodiments it is just left on overnight or for 1-14 days. Then the medicament and the occlusive dressing is removed and the patient receives therapeutic energy.
  • the therapeutic energy is UV light but in other embodiments it may be ultrasound, infrared light, blue light, or some other energy source.
  • therapeutic energy is delivered every day or multiple times per day for 4 days while in other embodiments, it is delivered after removal of the medicament and dressing and then the medicament is placed back on the skin. In other embodiments, the therapeutic energy is delivered over more than one day and then the medicament and dressing are placed back on the skin. In one embodiment the dressing and medicament are only worn and night while in another embodiment, the dressing is worn both day and night.
  • a method may include of the steps of: applying UV light in increments and increasing the percent increment over time until a burn occurs, then it calculates the incremental increase based on the last acceptable percent increase and the number of estimated doses left. Upon next burn the dose it can be adjusted again.
  • MED may be obtained through dose increase until a burn occurs, and set based on the last dose that did not create a burn. Once that is found, then the ability of the skin to adjust to dose increases is found. Dose may be decreased or increased based on skin—thickness, transepiderman water loss (TEWL), redness, scale, pigmentation, etc.
  • the last dose may be meant to cause erythema. If location is the same as previous, then use previous information to guide therapy. Another method may be to ask the patient if they think plaque is healing, or ask if they think plaque is gone. Any of these methods and apparatuses for performing them may not allow/prevent treatment within a certain time from last dose, e.g., 10 hrs, 12 hrs, 16 hrs, 18 hours, 20 hrs, etc., and also calculates dose based on the time since last treatment. For example, a dose that occurred 20 hours ago may be less than one at 26 hours. Any of these methods and apparatuses for performing them may ask if the dressing has been changed in order to adjust the predicted transmission of the dressing over time. Later on in the therapy, when there is less scale, the adjustment may decrease.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a method for calculating the dose of therapeutic energy that starts by finding the minimal erythema dose (MED).
  • MED minimal erythema dose
  • the MED may be estimated based on the persons age, weight, gender, ethnicity, history of phototherapy, skin type, skin pigmentation, skin thickness, skin hydration, TEWL, sensitivity to light, medications, treatment location, medical records or any other personal information.
  • This method is preferably used with a phototherapy device to treat a condition such as a skin disorder or disease but it may alternatively be used for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise.
  • the first dose is calculated by multiplying the MED times 0.95. In other embodiments the first dose is calculated by multiplying the MED by 0.1 to 1. Then then the first dose is delivered to the body by the therapeutic delivery device and this is recorded by the app or program. Upon the next dose, the user is asked if they received a burn or if their skin is sensitive or red from the last dose. If yes, they received a sham dose of light where no light is actually delivered to their skin. Then the app or program recalculates the same increment of the dose based on the last dose that did not create a burn or if that does not exist, the first dose. In addition, the safe increase of the increment is also calculated and all of this is recorded by the app or program.
  • the dose is incremented by the safe increment and the time is checked since the last dose.
  • the new dose is left as is if it has been less than 48 hours since the last dose.
  • 48-336 hours since the last dose there is a sliding scale reduction based linearly on the amount of time that it has been since the last dose that is centered on a 25% reduction in the dose.
  • it has been greater than 336 hours since the last dose the dose is sent to zero and the patient must start the therapy over from the beginning.
  • the time restrictions: 48 hours and 336 hours vary from 0-500 hours and the reduction center varies between 0 and 99%. Then the dose is delivered and this is recorded by the app or program.
  • the % increment is increased over time until a burn occurs, then it calculates the incremental increase based on the last acceptable percent increase and the number of estimated doses left. If MED occurs, dose increase is reduced based on the “predicted” acceptable dosing increase from previous sub-MED treatment and upon next burn it is adjusted again.
  • the initial dose, dose increment and increase of the increment may be based on MED, skin thickness, transepidermal water loss, health and unhealthy skin pigmentation, hydration or redness, amount of scale or any other measure of the skin.
  • the persons age, weight, gender, ethnicity, history of phototherapy, skin type, sensitivity to light, medications, medical records or any other personal information may be used to adjust the initial dose, dose increment and increase of the increment.
  • patient may be asked if the skin is healing and this information may be used to guide the dosing recommendations.
  • the patient may be asked if they have changed a dressing or how many days has it been since they changed a dressing located on the skin where the dose is going to occur.
  • dosing occurs every day but may occur multiple times per day, every other day, 1 time per week, 2 times per week, 3 times per week, 4 times per week, 5 times per week or 6 times per week.
  • any of the method described herein may include methods and apparatuses for implementing them that determine an initial dose.
  • methods and apparatuses for implementing them may determine an initial dose starts based on patients: skin thickness, TEWL (hole in the dressing, potentially where the magnet would connect), skin hydration, skin pigmentation, age, skin type, heritage, location of lesion, etc.
  • FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate one embodiment of a sensor 709 for use with the dressing 701 or on its own to measure skin 705 thickness, TEWL, skin hydration, skin pigmentation, skin type, or location of lesion.
  • One embodiment of the sensor utilizes a single sensor site that incorporate multiple sensors on the same site.
  • One embodiment of the sensor utilizes multiple sensor sites.
  • the sensor(s) site may be located directly below the sensor, within the treatment area for gathering data to characterize the plaque itself, or outside the treatment area to characterize the satellite skin.
  • One embodiment utilizes a dressing which is configured to offer unobstructed pathways for the sensor to reach the surface of the plaque 703 , or surface of the satellite skin.
  • the sensor may be directly incorporated into light 707 or may be part of a separate device or attachment that is intended to work in combination with the light or dressing, as shown in FIG. 7B , in which the sensor reaches through the plaque 711 , as shown.
  • LED-based light therapy with a filter for light below 300 nm, centered at 300 nm, centered at 300 nm and 310 nm, centered at 300 nm, 305 nm and 310 nm, etc.
  • An LED array with centers in a ratio that follow the therapeutic dose may include multiple LEDs at different wavelengths including: 1 ⁇ at 300 nm with 3 ⁇ -9 ⁇ at 310; 1 ⁇ at 300 nm, 2 ⁇ at 304, 3 ⁇ at 308, etc. (where x is a positive integer).
  • an array of LEDs with wavelength centers at more than one wavelength between 300 and 320 may be used, where with higher LED wavelengths there is higher total output power governed by the MED by, for example, having more LEDs at higher wavelengths, having higher power output LEDs at higher wavelengths, differing the amount of time that the LEDs are on, etc.
  • it may be particular helpful to include an array of LEDs with more than one center wavelength may include a line created by the wavelength vs. 10 th root of the dose has a slope of 0.015-0.05 between 300 and 320 where the dose is below the MED dose at each wavelength.
  • FIG. 8A illustrates an LED array controlled by an algorithm for determining the dose of light to be delivered by a specific light wavelength between 300 nm and 320 nm.
  • SED is equivalent to erythemal effective radiant exposure of 100 J/m 2 .
  • This algorithm is simple but difficult to translate into dosing algorithm for a multi-wavelength LED array and may be outdated because of recently published empirical data.
  • An LED array reflecting this algorithm may use LEDs with a similar power output in a ratio such as the following: 1 at 300 nm with 3-9 at 310 or 1 at 300 nm, 2 at 304, 3 at 308.
  • the light array may turn on LEDs for set time to deliver a dose of light that follows the algorithm listed above or use different LEDs with power levels that reflect the algorithm listed above.
  • Light array embodiments may include LED based light therapy with a filter that blocks light below 300 nm with LEDs with a center at 300 nm, a center at 303 nm, a center at 300 nm and 310 nm, a center at 303 nm and 310 nm or a center at 300 nm, 305 nm and 310 nm.
  • Alternative embodiments of a light array with a filter that blocks light below 300 nm may have any number of wavelength centers anywhere between 300 nm and 320 nm.
  • the filter may block all light below 296 nm, 297 nm, 298 nm or 299 nm.
  • a range of wavelength centers may be used such as 298-305 and 305-315.
  • a reflector may include one reflector for the 300 nm LED and 4 smaller reflectors for the 310 nm LED.
  • the reflector is configured to enable a square profile (e.g., using either or both a linear array and/or single LED).
  • FIG. 9A illustrates one embodiment of a reflector that is tailored to a relatively large square profile over a relatively short throw distance.
  • the power output from a point source LED is non-uniform and typically reduces as you move away from the center line.
  • the areas further away from the LED can receive much less energy. Additionally the incidence angle of the light at the areas farther from the LED become more and more acute. As the incidence angle of the light moves farther and farther away from perpendicular to the projection surface it can be detrimental to penetration depth for the treatment.
  • the embodiment illustrated in the cross section profile shown in FIG. 9B uses an elliptical back reflector, a parabolic inner reflector surface and an outer compound parabolic reflector surface.
  • the inner parabolic reflector places the LED point source at its focal point and redirects the lower power wider angled light directly at the projection surface making its incidence angle close to perpendicular.
  • the elliptical back reflector places the point source of the LED at one of its two focal points and redirects the higher energy light central to the LED through the 2nd focal point of the ellipse onto the outer compound parabolic reflector surface.
  • the outer compound parabolic reflector is positioned such that it shares its focal point with the 2nd focal point of the elliptical back reflector and redirects the light that goes through its focal point towards the projection surface.
  • FIGS. 9B-9C In order to alter the projected circle from a point source into a large square profile the reflector shown in FIGS. 9B-9C was designed such that the corners use a separate cross sectional shape than that of the flat sides. Each cross sectional shape is designed with its specific geometric requirements taken into account. The result is a reflector that reflects well into the corners of the square profile while creating a more even distribution over the area.
  • the reflector surfaces are such that they substantially reflect UV light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 9C this is achieved through spray coating of reflective paint.
  • Alternative embodiments could use polymer or metal deposition or chroming to coat the surfaces in a metalized coating or reflective plastic. Further embodiments could be constructed substantially from metals that reflect UV light.
  • FIG. 9B shows the back reflector being suspended over the LED using two side struts.
  • Alternative embodiments could mount the back reflector to a light passing lens covering the part or all of the reflector body.
  • the apparatus may use materials that are inert and UV clear such as Teflon, FEP or ePTFE derivatives that are not affected by an acid, benzene type molecules, creosotes, etc.
  • materials that are inert and UV clear such as Teflon, FEP or ePTFE derivatives that are not affected by an acid, benzene type molecules, creosotes, etc.
  • any materials that may decrease in UV transmission due to contact with medicament in hydrogel such as PVC, polyurethane or silicone) are not in direct contact with hydrogel may be used.
  • this figure illustrates one embodiment of the dressing assembly that includes a film that covers the outer surface of the hydrogel.
  • the film is represented by the 0.02′′ PTFE thin film in FIG. 2 .
  • the film may cover a single side of the hydrogel, or it may wrap around the side edges of the base.
  • the film does not cover the surface of the base that is in contact with the skin.
  • the material is inert to interaction with the base, other dressing assembly materials, the medicament, any component of skin solution, including urea, salts naturally occurring on the skin surface, sebum.
  • the layer is between 50 and 100% UVB transmissive to wavelengths between 300-320 nm.
  • the material has a low MVTR less than 400-500 ⁇ m/sqm/day by 3M Upright bottle method.
  • the material may be composed of glass, Teflon, FEP ePTFE derivatives or any other material that is resistant to degradation.
  • the layer is immobilized against the hydrogel layer to avoid smearing of any coal tar or medicament that may come in contact with the film.
  • an odor-reducing or odor-eliminating element or elements may be included.
  • any of these apparatuses or compositions may be low-odor or odorless (coal tar/extract including) compositions and/or dressings.
  • a coal tar or coal tar extract composition/dressing that does not emit an odor once placed on the skin may include be occlusive over the area covering the hydrogel but has a high MVTR on the thin film adhesive edges to allow it to stay in place (waterproof) after exposure to water and not roll up over time. Edges of hydrogel may be sealed with a flexible material like a wax to further reduce odor.
  • FIGS. 10 and 11 illustrates embodiments of a dressing that are configured to reduce the odor or MVTR of the hydrogel.
  • the adhesive perimeter 1105 may contain a formulation of chemicals that either neutralize the smell of the coal tar, or emit a preferable odor during the course of wear.
  • the adhesive perimeter may contain a layer of wax, oils, or a physical filter 1117 that reduce the odor or MVTR through the dressing material.
  • the filler may be formulated with chemicals that reduce or neutralize the smell of the coal tar, or prevent the odor from leaving the coal tar hydrogel through the perimeter of the gel.
  • the filler may be composed of a wax, hydrocolloid, closed cell foam, plastic, cellulose or any other flexible material with low vapor permeability.
  • the filler may be in a gel form or a solid form.
  • the filler covers the entire outer edge surface of the hydrogel 1103 .
  • the filler does not contain medicament, while in other embodiments the filler may contain corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy.
  • the filler may act as a reservoir of medicament that is initially outside of the treatment area but has the ability to diffuse into the treatment area over the course of wear.
  • the device may be placed over a plaque 1109 on the skin 1111 .
  • apparatuses for application to the body that include one or more body-part specific applicator which may be reusable with one or more disposable (e.g., dressing) components.
  • scalp and finger solutions may include foamed coal tar w petroleum to help occlude hair, polymer mix that is delivered as a liquid then gels into place when it hits the scalp and then can be washed off, a set of solutions for hand, face, scalp that include a beany, glove and headband, hairclip, glove/sock/cap having opening for top or bottom or foot or hand that match the size and shape of our dressing thin film 1107 outer edge, glove/sock/cap comes with a re-sealable pouch so hydrogel does not dry out once attached, allowing multiday use from one dressing, glove/sock/cap can be worn just at night and allows light treatment in the morning without any modification to our dressing or light, glove/sock/cap entire inner surface is hydrogel Entire glove is the coal tar hydrogel, glove/
  • any of the apparatuses described herein may be configured as daily wear, extended wear and/or night wear products. Any of these apparatuses or compositions (including dressings) may include pigmentation of the patch to match the skin 1111 .
  • the thin film may forma gap 1115 between the hydrogel and the edge of the dressing for sealing.
  • the film may be a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier, as described herein.
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B illustrate devices for delivery of a therapeutic agent to the scalp, fingers, knuckles or hands of a patient that conforms to the shape of the body part.
  • therapeutic agent is a foamed coal tar with base of petroleum that occludes the hair and scalp.
  • An alternative embodiment of this includes a different medicament other than coal tar such as coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy.
  • Another alternative embodiment includes a different base such as a hydrocolloid, hydrogel, alcohol, silicone gel, mineral oil, other oil, wax or other substance that may be used for a base.
  • the therapeutic agent contains a substance such as keratin, a metal such as silver or aluminum or gold, grease, wax, or other hair restoring or thickening or shining agent that increases the reflectivity of the hair to therapeutic light.
  • a polymer is mixed prior to application and then gels into place when it hits the scalp. It can then be washed off.
  • Other embodiments include occlusive conforming devices such as a cap, beany, glove, mitt, headband sock, shoe or hairclip to occlude the body part.
  • the glove/sock/cap has opening for top or bottom or foot or hand that match the size and shape of a dressing thin film outer edge such that the middle of the dressing containing a medicament directly contacts the skin.
  • the glove/sock/cap comes with a re-sealable pouch so that moisture and gases are not released, allowing multiday use from one device.
  • These embodiments may be worn just at night and allows light treatment in the morning without any modification to a separate dressing or light that attaches to the glove/sock/cap.
  • the entire inner surface of the glove/sock/cap is a base with a medicament.
  • the base with medicament of the glove/sock/cap can be separated between treatment and occlusion. This allows for daily wear, multi-day wear, or night wear of the device.
  • UV clear sticky pads can be put on the body with transducers on them to allow a “localized” light therapy in a full body treatment.
  • such embodiment may include: transducers to locate the plaque in 3D space using 1-5 transducers on the pad and a couple in the light box, reflectors to focus the LED lights to give a specific radiance at a specific distance, using the location of the pad in space along with the distance from the LEDs to determine the radiance of the LED on the patients skin, adding combined LED radiance numbers to tightly control the dosing of light the plaque, turning on or even focus the LEDs on the pads themselves, which could be automated; and/or shading/blocking parts of the sticky pad that are not affected, which could be permanent or erasable.
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate systems for locating treatment location on a body with an array of LEDs, temporary wear patch and transducers.
  • the reusable or disposable ultraviolet light clear sticky pads 1315 can be put on the body with transducers on them to allow a “localized” light therapy in a full body treatment.
  • the transducers 1305 may be incorporated into the dressing described herein. This may work by locating the locating the target treatment area 1301 in 3D space using 1-5 transducers on the patch and 1-5 transducers in the light box.
  • the LEDs may use reflectors, lens or a combination of both to focus the LED lights 1309 to give a specific radiance at a specific distance 1308 .
  • the LEDs may be moved manually or automatically to focus on the patch on the skin and the calculated radiance on the patch may be used to calculate the amount of time needed to deliver a therapeutic dose of light.
  • the LEDs may output UV light for treatment of a skin condition or disease while in other embodiments the system may be used for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise.
  • the therapeutic energy may UV light, ultrasound, infrared light, blue light, or some other energy source.
  • the automated motion of the LEDs may be done through a servo controlled motor or other mechanized way.
  • the patch may be shaded to block parts of the skin from treatment 1307 . This shading could be done with a marker, printout of a desired shape or other method that blocks therapeutic light.
  • the patches could be used through the course of a treatment or used one time and discarded.
  • the skin contact side of the patch may include emollients to hydrate the skin and improve light penetration through the skin.
  • a medicament may be mixed in base (e.g., gel, such as but not limited to a hydrogel).
  • base e.g., gel, such as but not limited to a hydrogel.
  • the medicament is crude coal tar or coal tar, it may be a distillate composing between 0.1% to 10% of the mixture.
  • the base may be an aqueous liquid that forms the continuous phase of the mixture that is more hydrophilic than hydrophobic.
  • the medicament may break up into particles greater than 0.001 mm in size.
  • the viscosity of the base after is mixing may be significantly greater than water such that the medicament particles tend to stay in suspension (and/or base may be cross-linked to form a semi-solid).
  • the mixture may be layered or molded onto a dressing and placed in gas impermeable pouch.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a method by which medicament is incorporated into the hydrogel structure.
  • the process may involve adding crude coal tar or a distillate of crude coal tar to a solution of hydrogel component(s), in order that the coal tar distillate comprises between 0.1% and 10% of the total mixture.
  • the medicament is a corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy.
  • the hydrogel base may consist of a single component, or multiple components. In the preferred embodiment, the water component is 90% by weight of the hydrogel but may vary from 50-99% of the hydrogel by weight.
  • the hydrogel may contain other components such as alcohol, silicone, oil, wax, surfactant, aloe, salts such as magnesium, calcium, sodium or potassium or any other substance.
  • the gel is mixed into a portion of the hydrogel components, which have a viscosity greater than water at skin temperature, but do not completely dissolve the medicament in solution.
  • the curing process does not involve the addition of any agents that may cause a negative reaction on the skin surface.
  • the curing and thickening process may be through cold/hot cycling, de-hydration, click hydrogel structure formation, gamma beam, ultraviolet light or any other curing process.
  • the gelation process begins to occur immediately after all of the gel components are mixed. During the mixing the medicament is broken into globules a generally similar size.
  • the globules of medicament are greater than 0.001 mm in size. In other embodiments the globules range in size from individual molecules to 1 cm in size.
  • viscosity of the base after is mixing is significantly greater than water such that the medicament particles tend to stay in suspension.
  • the base is cross-linked to form a semi-solid or solid such that the medicament particles tend to stay in suspension. After completion of the mixing, the mixture is layered or molded onto a dressing and place in a gas and liquid impermeable pouch.
  • dressings that may be particularly comfortably worn, yet provide occlusive treatment of skin conditions with any of the medicaments described herein.
  • dressing containing a suspension of a hydrophobic medicament at a concentration of less than about 10% that is both UV blocking and UVA photosensitizing in hydrophilic gel that passes UVB light and blocks UVA light.
  • the UVA blocking material may be, for example, HEXYL 2-[4-(DIETHYLAMINO)-2-HYDROXYBENZO.
  • the dressing may include one or more layers that filter the light (e.g., UVA and/or UVB) passed.
  • any of these dressings may include an additional layer (e.g., a “scrim” fabric) molded into the edges of the gel in order to attach to a polyurethane thin film.
  • the medicament may be arranged in columns that are orientated perpendicular to the surface of the dressing. See, e.g., FIG. 15 .
  • a mostly open very thin fabric layer on the top may make the patch more visually appealing, while permitting light (UVA and/or UVB light) to pass through.
  • the hydrogel may contain a water retaining humectant such as sorbitol.
  • the medicament may be mixed in a water absorbing compound and arranged in a distributed pattern (e.g., see FIG. 16 ).
  • the water absorbing compound is a hydrocolloid that lines the edges of the hydrogel that reduces or prevents odor.
  • Also described herein are methods including the use of a device of apparatus for performing these methods, such as software, firmware, and/or hardware, including an application software for a handheld device, such as a smartphone) that automatically sets the recommended amount of sun (and/or therapeutic light) exposure based on the local UV index.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an exploded view of an occlusive dressing with a hydrogel containing a medicament for treatment of a skin condition with multiple layers including a thin film polyurethane with a pressure-sensitive adhesive such as acrylic 1501 , a fabric layer 1503 , a medicament 1509 at a concentration of ⁇ 10% that is both UV blocking and UVA photosensitizing in suspension in hydrophilic gel that passes UVB light and blocks UVA light.
  • the blocking layer 1505 could be a band pass filter that allows 300-320 nm, a low pass filter that passes light below 320 or a band blocking filter that blocks between 320-380 nm.
  • FIG. 15 also includes a thin, visually appealing and mostly open thin fabric 1503 which would allow most of the UV light pass through it but may mask the hydrogel and the lesion that it is covering.
  • the medicament 15 also illustrates how the medicament could be placed in columns that are orientated perpendicular to the surface of the dressing. This type of orientation would allow for the light to pass through at a transmission that was roughly equivalent to the percentage of the UV blocking medicament in the dressing. For example, if the medicament was 10% orientated perpendicular to the surface of the dressing and roughly parallel with the UV light entering the hydrogel, the transmission would approach 90%.
  • This figure also demonstrates how a scrim material 1507 could be partially molded into the hydrogel and allow for attachment of the hydrogel to the polyurethane thin film around the edges of the hydrogel, which may not otherwise readily adhere directly to the polyurethane thin film. With the UV blocking scrim on the border, it may allow light to transmit freely to the lesion.
  • a humectant may be added to prevent water loss.
  • humectants are Propylene glycol, hexylene glycol, and butylene glycol, Glyceryl triacetate, Neoagarobiose, Sugar alcohols (sugar polyols) such as glycerol, sorbitol, xylitol, maltitol, Polymeric polyols such as polydextrose, Quillaia, Urea, Aloe vera gel, MP diol, Alpha hydroxy acids such as lactic acid, Honey, Egg yolk and egg white, Lithium chloride, Sodium hexametaphosphate E452i. As described herein, however, in some variations it may be particularly beneficial to avoid humectants such as sorbitol or glycerol, or which may act as surfactants.
  • FIG. 16 shows an example of a medicament, such as coal tar, mixed in a hydrocolloid and arranged in a distributed pattern to allow for distribution of the medicament to the lesion.
  • This distribution pattern could be a checked, spherical, hexagonal, zig zag, or any other pattern that distributes the medicament relatively evenly over the treatment lesion.
  • the hydrocolloid as a tacky, water absorbent material could also increase adherence of the dressing to the skin.
  • the hydrocolloid could be distributed around the edges of the dressing without the medicament to increase adherence and prevent a medicament from escaping, thereby reducing the odor of a medicament such as coal tar.
  • FIG. 19A illustrates an embodiment of a dressing assembly that includes a hydrophobic thin film 1903 that eliminates, or reduces the absorption of skin solutions during wear.
  • They hydrophobic layer 1901 may also be configured to aid in the delivery of the medicament to the skin.
  • the hydrophobic layer may be applied to the hydrogel after polymerization (e.g., when the hydrogel comprises a thin film of medical grade silicone lubricant), or may be added to the hydrogel surface during polymerization.
  • Another embodiment may comprise an antiperspirant in a layer between the hydrogel and the skin to reduce the absorption of skin solutions into the hydrogel.
  • any of these dressings may also have a thin film (e.g., a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier 1905 ) placed on top of the hydrogel that is UVB clear and resistant to any UV transmission degradation due to contact with skin solutions (including urea, salts, sebum), medicaments within the hydrogel, other dressing assembly materials, or any typical skin products that may be used.
  • the film may be a 0.001′′ ETFE thin film 1905 .
  • the film may cover a single side of the hydrogel, or it may wrap around the side edges of the base.
  • the film may not cover the surface of the base that is in contact with the skin.
  • the layer may be between 50 and 100% UVB transmissive to wavelengths between 300-320 nm.
  • the moisture vapor transmission rate (MVTR) of the material may be adjusted by puncturing holes or channels through the thin film layer.
  • the material may be composed of Teflon, FEP or ePTFE derivatives.
  • the layer may also be composed of fluorosilicones. The layer may be immobilized against the hydrogel layer to avoid smearing of any coal tar or medicament that may come in contact with the film.
  • the dressing may also include an optional a paper carrier 1097 .
  • the base or body of the dressing 1909 may be formed of a thin film of material (e.g., PU), and may have an open window or center region across which the medicament (e.g., the hydrogel with the coal tar/coal tar extract 1901 ) may be extended.
  • the dressing may also include a medical lubricant 1903 , and/or a release liner 1911 .
  • the hydrogel may be configured for securing within the window, and may also be configured to prevent shrinking, and particularly contraction, of the hydrogel in use, including with dehydration. Contraction may thicken the hydrogel and may decrease the UV transparency.
  • a mechanical support such as a scrim material 1915 (e.g., a mesh or grid of fibers) may extend through and from the edge region of the hydrogel. In some variations the scrim extends completely through the hydrogel; in other variations, the scrim extends through just a region or portion of the hydrogel, e.g., in the x and y directions of the plane of the hydrogel.
  • FIGS. 19B and 19C illustrate another example of a dressing.
  • the dressing is shown in an exploded view, with the base 1951 , which may include an adhesive for holding it onto the skin (and temporarily holding the release liner 1954 over the otherwise exposed hydrogel 1901 ).
  • a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier 1953 may extend across the window 1955 through the base.
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be formed of any material that is a vapor occlusive barrier, that is both chemically inert and inert with respect to the UV transparency.
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be a coating or thin film (e.g., having a thickness of less than 0.005 inches (e.g., less than 0.004 inches, less than 0.003 inches, less than 0.002 inches, less than 0.001 inches, etc.).
  • the material forming the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier should remain transparent even when contacted with acids/bases and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that may otherwise for greater than some amount of time (e.g., 1 day, 2 days, 7 days, one month, 2 months, 100 days, 150 days, 6months, 1 year, etc.) does not change its UV transparency by more than a fixed percent (e.g., 10%, 7.5%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%) when exposed to a compatible compound (e.g., a solvent, acid, base or VOC) at room temperature.
  • a compatible compound e.g., a solvent, acid, base or VOC
  • the compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds, and particularly: Acetylsalicylic acid, Ascorbic acid, Aluminum hydroxide, Salicylic acid, Ammonium hydroxide, Calcium hydroxide, Sodium hyphochlorite (bleach), Sodium carbonate, Sodium bicarbonate, Benzene, Formaldehyde, Chloroflourocarbons, alcohols (e.g., benzyl, ethyl, isobutyl, methyl, etc.), Coal tar, Creosotes, Ammonia Nitrate, Uric acid, Urocanic acid, Hydrogen peroxide, Naptholene, Sulfates (sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium laureth sulfate), Phenols, P-Amino Benzoic Acid, and Pyridoxine.
  • Acetylsalicylic acid Ascorbic acid, Aluminum hydroxide, Salicylic acid, Ammonium hydroxide,
  • the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier is formed of an ETFE material, such as Tefzel.
  • This material (at thickness less than about 0.005 inches) is substantially UV-transparent (e.g., >90%), chemically resistant, and does not change UV transparency significantly after >100 hours of exposure to the compatible compounds listed above.
  • fluoropolymers that are optically (and particularly UV) transparent may also work.
  • the hydrogel 1901 is formed into a layer into which coal tar is held (e.g., as micro-globules, clusters, lines, columns, etc.) and a scrim border 1912 extends along all four sides (in the x and y direction of the plane of the layer).
  • this configuration may help secure the hydrogel across the window to the base 1951 , but may also prevent the hydrogel from contracting in the x and y direction (and therefore thickening in the transverse z direction).
  • Anchoring or otherwise preventing the hydrogel e.g., in this example using a scrim material that extends out of the hydrogel and attaches to the frame of the dressing, may prevent the gel from contracting in the x or y directions.
  • the frame may therefore be sufficiently “rigid” and/or may be adhesively anchored to the skin.
  • the dressing may thin-out in the z-direction (lose thickness), due in part to syneresis (e.g., loss of water from the gel) and degradation of the hydrogel material. In practice, this does not appear to greatly affect UV transmission.
  • the inventors have performed studies showing that contraction of the hydrogel (in the x and y direction) contributes to UV transmission loss. By securing the hydrogels in the dressing, gel contraction is minimized, and UV transmission loss over time may also be significantly minimized
  • FIG. 39 illustrates the effect of contraction on a hydrogel including a coal tar/coal tar extract (b/w 0.025% and 10%).
  • the data shows the divergence of U.V. transmissivity between gels that are restrained from contracting in the x-y direction (triangles) vs gels that are allowed to contract in the x-y direction (squares). Hydrogels that are restrained remain visually clearer than the unrestrained gels and over time exposed to air (dehydration time) there is substantial loss of UV transmission, as shown.
  • a ‘scrim’ material may be a reinforcement material and may be woven or non-woven.
  • the scrim may be formed of fibers or strands.
  • the scrim may be a polyester or cellulose material.
  • the scrim is polyester and adheres to the base (e.g., a polyurethane base).
  • a polyester scrim does not wick away water from the gel towards the PU adhesive, which may increase adherence of PU to skin.
  • the dressing also includes a perimeter or boarder layer of hydrocolloid material that, as described above, may help prevent odors and may protect the hydrogel (with coal tar) layer.
  • Any of the dressings described herein may also include one or more couplers to couple a UV light source to the dressing in a fixed position.
  • four magnetic contacts which may be magnetic themselves, or may be a material to which a magnet may attach
  • the couplers in this example are peripheral to the window. In other variations, the couplers may be surrounded by the window region.
  • FIG. 19C shows an example of the dressing of FIG. 19B assembled, having a relatively flat profile.
  • the gel may be heat cured (e.g., at between 30-40° C. for between 1-4 hours, e.g., 2 hours at 35° C.).
  • a very high salt e.g., MgCl 2
  • MgCl 2 a very high salt
  • 10% MgCl 2 may be used which may help keep the coal tar globules or clusters from dissolving into the gel.
  • coal tar Although coal tar has a low solubility in aqueous solution, it does have a very low rate of dissolution, which may be increased or assisted by other compounds, including, as identified by the inventors humectants such as sorbitol and glycerol. As coal tar dissolves into solution, the inventors have found that the U.V. transmittance of that solution decreases. In the context of the dressings described herein, a decrease in U.V. transmittance may require a longer treatment time (given that power output from the light cannot be increased) or may make treatment with the dressing impossible or impractical.
  • MgCl 2 at 5% or greater (e.g., 7.5%, 10%, 15%, etc.) increases the hydrophobic effect of the coal tar, which may lead to tighter coal tar globule formation and lower coal tar solubility, and therefore a higher equilibrium UV transmittance.
  • Sorbitol had previously been used in the gel formulation for its surfactant properties, however it leads to an increased solubility of coal tar in water. Typically the greater the percentage of MgCl 2 the better the effect.
  • MgCl 2 percentages e.g., 7.5%, 10%, or more
  • the sizes of the globules may be similar, so that they are predominantly within a predicted size range (e.g., +/ ⁇ 50% of the average size).
  • the coal tar globules microglobules, e.g., between 10 and 100 ⁇ m diameter
  • they may be uniformly distributed throughout (e.g., homogenously).
  • any of the dressing described herein may initially keep the medicament (e.g., coal tar) separate from the hydrogel for adding later.
  • the microglobules of coal tar may be initially separate from the hydrogel and combined either immediately after or shortly before applying the dressing to the patient.
  • a removable or frangible cover may separate the medicament from the hydrogel.
  • the medicament may be lyophilized or dried onto a material prior to to adding to a hydrogel.
  • the medicament may be separately stored and injected or added into the hydrogel (e.g., by applying force to the dressing).
  • the microglobules of coal tar are suspended in a thin hydrophobic medium that is placed exposed to the hydrogel prior to or shortly after application, and the hydrophobic medium removed.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a dressing in which the active agent 2005 (e.g., a medicament, such as coal tar) is kept separate from other portions of the dressing by a removable or frangible barrier 2003 that can be removed, or broken, to release the medicament immediately before or shortly after applying to the skin for treatment so that it can be combined with the hydrogel 2001 .
  • the active agent 2005 e.g., a medicament, such as coal tar
  • a removable or frangible barrier 2003 that can be removed, or broken, to release the medicament immediately before or shortly after applying to the skin for treatment so that it can be combined with the hydrogel 2001 .
  • This variation may allow a consistent and predictable pattern of medicament (e.g., coal tart or coal tar extract) within the hydrogel.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a method for introducing a medicament (e.g., tar) into the hydrogel matrix.
  • the medicament 2101 in this example is combined with a magnetizing material, for example iron oxide.
  • the magnetizing material may be left in the hydrogel matrix after polymerization, or may be removed.
  • the medicament may be pre-filled in the mold 2100 prior to polymerizing the hydrogel.
  • a magnetic field can be applied in order to draw the medicament solution through the hydrogel matrix as the gel is polymerizing.
  • the electromagnet(s) 2105 can be cycled or reversed in order to modulate the rate or shape by which the coal tar is drawn into the matrix.
  • This method may be used to draw crude coal tar, a coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy into the hydrogel matrix.
  • the medicament may be a combination of medicaments.
  • the hydrogel matrix can be cured heat, UV light, or by addition of a curing agent.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a method for introducing a medicament such as coal tar into the hydrogel matrix.
  • the coal tar may be mechanically drawn up into an instrument along with other liquid components of a hydrogel matrix, mixed within the instrument, and subsequently sprayed onto a dressing 2205 .
  • Another embodiment draws up the coal tar 2201 and hydrogel solution 2203 , mixes the solutions, and injects the mixed solutions into a mold.
  • the dressing may be a hydrogel or hydrocolloid, or a plastic thin film that is occlusive to the skin, or any combination thereof.
  • the coal tar solution may be crude coal tar, or may be pre-mixed with hydrogel or hydrocolloid components.
  • the hydrogel pre-crosslink may contain of the hydrogel components, or may contain a fraction of the gel components.
  • a curing agent may be applied within the spraying instrument.
  • the hydrogel may be cured using heat, UV light, or a curing agent.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a method for dispersing a medicament (e.g., coal tar) away from the treatment area during light irradiation.
  • the coal tar solution within a dressing may be combined with a magnetizing material, as discussed above.
  • the magnetized coal tar solution may be dispersed within in the dressing.
  • As coal tar may block the therapeutic UV light from reaching the skin (e.g., as discussed above), moving the coal tar away from the skin prior to and/or during the application of UV light may enhance the therapeutic effects.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a method for dispersing a medicament (e.g., coal tar) away from the treatment area during light irradiation.
  • the coal tar solution within a dressing may be combined with a magnetizing material, as discussed above.
  • the magnetized coal tar solution may be dispersed within in the dressing.
  • As coal tar may block the therapeutic UV light from reaching the skin (e.g., as discussed above), moving the coal tar away from the skin prior
  • the coal tar solution 2301 may either be a liquid that is contained within a pouch or may be unbounded within a hydrogel matrix.
  • Magnets 2305 on the light device may draw the coal tar solution to the corners of the dressing 2307 and away from the treatment area.
  • a magnet located centrally may be used in order to re-distribute the coal tar back towards the center.
  • the coal tar may also or alternatively return to even distribution by diffusion of coal tar solution over time.
  • the user may redistribute the coal tar solution by manually pushing the solution around in the gel.
  • the light device may have more magnets distributed around the dressing to aid in drawing the coal tar away from the center.
  • Another embodiment includes a magnetic bar that moves across the treatment area prior to the start of treatment in order sweep the coal tar solution to one side of the treatment area.
  • the dressing may be manipulated (e.g., mechanically manipulated) once applied to the skin to control the amount of UV light that is passed through.
  • a “thicker” dressing may be desirable to include a large amount of available medicament that may be deployed on to and/or into the skin.
  • light transmission through a thick dressing may be low or variable.
  • dressings that may be modulated once applied to the skin to modify the thickness and therefore the transmission of medicament and/or UV light to the skin.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a method for dispersing coal tar 2401 away from the treatment area during light irradiation. This embodiment includes a reservoir 2405 that has the capacity to be filled with coal tar suspension from the main treatment area 2405 .
  • a coal tar solution 2401 may be pushed into and out of the reservoir either by the patient 2407 or by contact with the light device.
  • the reservoir may accept all of the coal tar suspension, or a portion of the overall coal tar solution, leaving a layer of coal tar solution left on the main treatment area that is much thinner 2409 allowing more therapeutic light to be transmitted to the skin.
  • the coal tar solution may be pushed between the one or more reservoirs manually, or some elastic/mechanical aspect may be applied to either the reservoir or the main treatment area in order that the coal tar solutions tends to one or the other.
  • a valve may be used between the reservoir and the main treatment area.
  • the reservoir may contain a valve for re-filling/adding coal tar solution as necessary. Another embodiment uses multiple reservoirs.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an alternative method for dispersing the coal tar away from the treatment area during light irradiation, using the therapeutic light applicator.
  • the coal tar 2501 is suspended in liquid form and contained within the dressing.
  • pressure is applied 2503 from the light device 2505 , the liquid coal tar solution is spread away from the treatment area.
  • a treatment area 2507 may be cleared, permitting more of the therapeutic light to be passed.
  • the coal tar solution moves back towards the main treatment area.
  • any of the dressing described herein may permit optimization of UVB transparency of our dressing while in contact with the skin.
  • any of the dressing described herein may regulate the dose of light (UV light) by stopping or limiting the absorption of UV absorbing components from sweat by adding a thin hydrophobic layer between the hydrogel and the skin.
  • a dressing may include a thin film that is placed on top of the hydrogel that is UVB clear and chemically inert to coal tar, like a fluorosilicone or Teflon based film to prevent compounds from degrading the UV transparency of the top layer of the dressing.
  • dressings that stop exudate of UV absorbing components from the skin by adding an antiperspirants layer between the hydrogel and the skin.
  • any of these dressings may make UV absorbing components released from the skin (detritus, sweat, oils) non-UV absorbing.
  • Other modifications to the dressing may regulate the amount of UVA/UVB passed.
  • any of these dressing may compensate for UVB transparency lost by placing a UVB detector in the light, potentially with a small UV reflector (Mylar) on the underside of the dressing.
  • the medicament may be distributed in a pattern that permits the passing of therapeutic light to the skin while still permitting contact with the medicament on the skin.
  • the medicament may be distributed in a pattern that permits the light passing, or it may include one or more channels, guides, or passages (including light guides) through the otherwise light absorbing/blocking medicament.
  • any of these apparatuses may include one or more layers of a hydrocolloid in a pattern that the hydrogel is molded around.
  • the coal tar is arranged in columns perpendicular to the top surface of the dressing; in general, the coal tar may be aggregated in any pattern (e.g., aggregated in specific patterns in the hydrogel).
  • the coal tar may be added to the hydrogel in micro needles to insert the coal tar in columns.
  • the coal tar (or other medicament) may be mixed with a magnetizing material (e.g., iron oxide) in a strong magnetic field to orientate the medicament, e.g., in columns.
  • a magnetizing material e.g., iron oxide
  • the dressing may be made to include channels in the dressing for the coal tar where it can only exit on one side, such as a hollow wax tube that is open only on one side.
  • the medicament may be displaced away from the skin without removing the dressing.
  • the dressing may be massaged or otherwise manipulated to move the medicament out of the way during treatment: e.g., pushed out of the way with electromagnets (when combined with a ferromagnetic material) and/or pushed out of the way mechanically into the sides or into a reservoir, such as using a roller pins (e.g., magnetic roller pin) that pushes the medicament out of the way by a magnetic field and/or mechanically.
  • electromagnets when combined with a ferromagnetic material
  • a roller pins e.g., magnetic roller pin
  • any of the dressings described herein may also be adapted to prevent the drop in transmission over time that may occur if the coal tar dissolves, and/or if the amount of water in the medicament (hydrogel) decreases over time.
  • a water-absorbing hydrocolloid borer may be positioned around the hydrogel portion of the apparatus.
  • one or more salts may be added to the hydrogel.
  • any of the dressings described herein may include a crosslinked hydrogel matrix of 10-90% water, 0.1-10% coal tar suspended in the crosslinked hydrogel matrix, and 1-60% mineral salts (Mg, Ca, Na, Cl, etc.) dissolved in the water (e.g., 10-50% mineral salts, 20-40% mineral salts, etc., including any sub ranges thereof).
  • hydrogel water loss in the packaging or after application may cause adhesion degradation of the the thin film, as well as hydrogel water loss during wear (which may also cause a loss of adhesion of the dressing).
  • the water absorbing hydrocolloid border around the hydrogel may further address this.
  • a surfactant as part of the hydrogel composition, and such composition are described herein, in some variations it may be beneficial to remove all surfactants from the composition, so that it is surfactant-free.
  • any of the apparatuses and compositions described herein may exclude surfactants from the hydrogel.
  • Doses may be delivered automatically, manually or semi-automatically (e.g., in which the dose is calculated automatically, but may be manually triggered).
  • the methods and apparatuses may be configured to allow automatically delivering doses or assisting in delivering them.
  • described herein are methods for applying light therapy, and/or for regulating the use of any of the dressing described herein for phototherapy (e.g., treatment of a skin condition such as psoriasis).
  • control logic such as software, hardware, firmware or some combination thereof, to treat.
  • the control logic may be executable on a hand-held apparatus such as a tablet, smartphone, wearable electronics (smartwatch, glasses, etc.) to regulate and/or control the application of treatment to the subject, including apply light therapy and/or instructing the user when to remove or adjust the dressing or light applicator, and/or when to cover the treatment area from exposure to environmental light.
  • a hand-held apparatus such as a tablet, smartphone, wearable electronics (smartwatch, glasses, etc.) to regulate and/or control the application of treatment to the subject, including apply light therapy and/or instructing the user when to remove or adjust the dressing or light applicator, and/or when to cover the treatment area from exposure to environmental light.
  • Any of these apparatuses and/or methods may track and monitor doses over time, including over days, weeks or months. Any of these apparatuses and/or methods may use information based on the user's environment, including ambient light exposure, to adjust applied therapy or dressing.
  • control logic that is configured as a non-transitory machine-readable medium that stores instructions, which, when performed by a machine, cause the machine to perform operations.
  • this control logic may be configured as software that is executable on a device, such as a dedicated device, including the therapeutic light applicator, and/or a processor in communication with the device, such as a smartphone.
  • the control logic may be configured to collect and provide information to/from the user (e.g., via one or more user interfaces) allowing the user to control the application of the light therapy to one or more lesions on the user's body.
  • the control logic may track the therapy applied.
  • the control logic may also determine how much therapy to be applied, as will be described in greater detail below.
  • FIGS. 38A-38G illustrate user interfaces showing tracking of treatment doses between different lesions.
  • the user interfaces described herein may be adapted to allow a user to easily and reliably control the light dose applied in a manner that is not possible manually.
  • FIGS. 17A-17K illustrate user interfaces for one variations of a control logic (e.g., software) for controlling/regulating a light therapy (light source) as described herein.
  • a control logic e.g., software
  • the user interface may permit the user to connect to the light source, start/stop treatment, and view use, report treatment information (e.g., to a remote server, electronic medical record, etc.), detect connection between the dressing and/or patient (e.g., a magnetic frame/guide on the patient even if a dressing is not used), calculate dose, and the like.
  • the control logic may guide the patient through the application of the dose(s) to one or more body regions (lesions on the body). For example, the control logic may confirm a connection is made between the dressing and the therapeutic light source (applicator), and instruct the user to reapply or adjust the attachment.
  • the control logic may also warn the user to apply eye protection ( FIG. 17B ).
  • the control logic may then calculate the dose to be applied (see below) and/or control the applicator to apply the dose ( FIG. 17C ), while coordinating which lesions receive doses.
  • the control logic may control a handheld electronic device to communicate with the therapeutic light source (applicator), and may turn on/off the therapeutic light source (applicator) and otherwise regulate the therapeutic light source to apply the determined dose automatically as shown in FIG. 17F , permitting the user to override the application if necessary.
  • the applicator may monitor the delivered dose to confirm that the applicator remains against the body ( FIG. 17G ), for example, by determining that the applicator is coupled to the dressing.
  • the control logic may also regulate the operation of the therapeutic light source, including preventing the therapeutic light source from overheating or otherwise operating outside of optimal parameter bounds ( FIG. 17H ).
  • the control logic may also receive confirmation that the dose was applied, including confirmation that the light(s) of the therapeutic light source turned on ( FIG. 17I ).
  • control logic may generally determine and control the dose applied by the therapeutic light source (applicator). This may be particularly important in the determination of partial doses, which are generally not considered under current treatment methods. Partial doses may occur, for example, when a subject is treated for a portion of the dosing time that is interrupted. An interruption may occur because the user terminates the session, or because of device failure, because the therapeutic light source is accidentally or intentionally removed from the dressing (or frame), or the like.
  • a complete dose is not delivered, but it may be particularly difficult to know when to apply the subsequent dose in order to provide optimal effective therapy; application of a new dose too early may result in burning or harming the skin, and waiting too long may result in too little dosing, resulting in ineffective or less effective treatment.
  • the control logic (application software) regulates the delivery of a dose for a calculated dose period (e.g., 45 seconds). If the dose is terminated early, the apparatus may prevent an additional dose from being delivered, as shown in FIG. 17K . The timing to the next dose may be estimated based on the partial dose applied. Alternatively, the apparatus may calculate a partial dose to be applied immediately and present the user with the option to continue/apply this additional dose.
  • control logic may also or alternatively be used to regulate the amount of ambient (natural) light, and particularly natural UV light that could benefit the user.
  • the apparatus may use one or more indicators of ambient UV light to determine how long the user should allow or benefit from exposure to natural light.
  • the amount of natural light exposure may be used in determining a therapeutic does from a therapeutic light source (applicator).
  • the amount and timing of a therapeutic light application to the patient may be combined with ambient UV light (from sun exposure) to provide a user with an indicator of how much light exposure to allow.
  • FIG. 18 describes a method, which may be implemented automatically using a set of instructions that, when executed, control an electronics device such as a smartphone to automatically set and/or display a recommended amount of sun exposure based on the local UV index.
  • the user's location may be determined by GPS from the handheld device (e.g., smartphone), user input, or other location service such as IP address or WiFi signal.
  • the control logic may then determine a UV index from an online database that provides the daily index based location (e.g., zip code or other location identifier).
  • the control logic e.g., app
  • the output may be used automatically by providing a timer for the patient to indicate the time of sun exposure.
  • any of the dressings provided herein may be used with this control logic to provide a user guidance on the amount of time that they may be exposed to sunlight when wearing the dressing (or when not wearing a dressing) for treatment of a lesion.
  • This information may also or instead be used to determine a dose and/or dosing regimen based on the amount of light to be applied by the therapeutic light source that may connect to the dressing.
  • any of the apparatuses described herein may be configured to determine, confirm, and/or detect contact between the therapeutic light applicator and the dressing or frame for securing the therapeutic light applicator to the patient over a lesion.
  • dressings and/or therapeutic light applicator securing frames that detect contact with the therapeutic light applicator.
  • Contact may be detected magnetically, electrically, mechanically, or some combination thereof.
  • the contact may be determined magnetically.
  • described herein area apparatuses and methods of detecting contact between a dressing and a therapeutic light applicator.
  • Either or both the dressing (or other holder for the therapeutic light applicator) and the therapeutic light applicator may include a sensor to detect/determine and/or quantify contact between the two.
  • any of these apparatuses may measure the contact, including, for example, measuring the change in a magnetic field when a magnet on a dressing comes in contact with a larger magnet on the therapeutic light applicator.
  • one or both of the therapeutic light applicator and dressing including a magnetic field concentrator consisting of a ferromagnetic strip that extends at least 0.5′′ from the small magnet on the dressing with a hall effect sensor positioned above the end of the ferromagnetic strip (farthest away from magnets) in vertical alignment with axis of magnetic field.
  • a Hall Effect sensor may be calibrated when a proximity sensor identifies that it is not in contact with a surface and then detects a change in a magnetic field when the proximity sensor identifies that is in contact with a surface. This configuration may permit the detection of the magnetic field and therefore contact between the therapeutic light applicator and the applicator.
  • 26-29 illustrate variations of therapeutic light applicators and dressings that are configured to sense contact between the two.
  • a Hall Effect sensor is included with a ferromagnetic concentrator.
  • the concentrator is folded on itself at the end closest to the Hall Effect sensor, which may increase the change in the magnetic field.
  • the Hall Effect sensor is orientated horizontal to the axis of the magnetic field and positioned on the bottom of the large magnet closest to the small magnet.
  • FIG. 26 shows how a ferromagnetic material is used as a concentrator to enhance Hall Effect sensing.
  • the Hall Effect sensor can be moved further away from the small magnet and in turn the big magnet. This reduces the effects of the large magnet in overwhelming the sensor.
  • a very large magnet will in effect be attached to the end of the concentrator, making the other end of it strongly magnetic and the Hall Effect sensor can pick up a large change in magnetic field.
  • the concentrator can be made more effective by putting a fold in the end of the ferromagnetic strip, underneath the Hall Effect sensor, as shown in the orange box in FIG. 26 .
  • FIG. 27 the Hall Effect sensor is oriented vertically.
  • FIG. 28 schematically illustrates another example of a hell effect sensor.
  • the Hall Effect sensor is placed in the center of the ring magnet with sensing axis perpendicular to magnet axis.
  • the light applicator or a processor communicating with the light applicator may magnetically detect contact between the light therapy source (light) and the dressing (patch).
  • FIG. 27 shows another configuration for using the Hall Effect sensor.
  • the magnetic field of the large magnet in the sensing axis may not be very high because most of the field lines run vertically along the height of the cylinder. This allows the Hall Effect sensor to not get overwhelmed by the large magnet and can be used to pick up the presence of the small magnet when the light unit is in contact with the patch.
  • the field readings taken from the Hall Effect sensor may be subject to drift over time.
  • the therapeutic light applicator unit may therefore be able to calibrate its “on dressing” field and “off dressing” field by: a proximity sensor (or an IR reflector, as described in FIG.
  • the therapeutic light applicator may start with a broad calibration range guess for the “On state” and even if one of the, e.g., 2 (or 4), Hall Effect sensors fall within that guess range, assume the device is placed on top of the dressing and calibrate all sensors with finer precision to their “On state”. If none of the sensor readings fall within the initial guess range, the system may assume that the therapeutic light applicator is not on the dressing and calibrate all sensors to “Off state”.
  • FIG. 29 shows an example of contact sensing using an optical detector in which a dressing having an MIRC ink signature is read by the light using a MIRC reader.
  • a reflector on the surface of the dressing may confirm contact when an emitter transmits a signal that is received by a small receiver (e.g., on the therapeutic light applicator).
  • FIG. 29 shows how an IR proximity sensor, or similar device with an emitter and a receiver, can be used to sense the placement on dressing.
  • Two parts of the dressing, away from the treatment area, can be covered by a shiny material such as aluminum, gold, or Mylar, IR reflective paint, tape or fabric for increased flexibility.
  • these IR reflective surfaces may be positioned directly underneath the IR proximity sensor. Because they would be so much more IR reflective than skin or other natural surfaces, this can be used to detect the presence of the patch.
  • control logic such as software/firmware/hardware, including non-transitory machine-readable medium that stores instructions
  • the apparatus may calculate and control the applied dose of light.
  • a daily light dose may be calculated by calculating the estimated minimal erythema dose (MED) of the patient remnant dose from prior treatments and then subtracting the remnant dose from the prior treatments to calculate the dose for that day.
  • the remnant dose calculation may be a continuous function that is non-linear, as described below.
  • the target dose may be a daily dose, and in general the target dose may be calculated when dose are missed based on a continuous function (e.g., which may be adapted from American Academy of Dermatology Guidelines, for example).
  • the daily (or target) dose may be determined using the MED and photoadaptation rate of the patient.
  • the first sensitization may give a current MED and provide an estimates photoadaptation rate; second sensitization may reset MED and give a photoadaptation rate.
  • a third sensitization may set the photoadaptation limit. Subsequent sensitization may reset the photoadaptation limit by lowering by the photoadaptation rate.
  • two or more sources of light may be “dose balanced” to provide equal contribution to minimum erythema dose by taking into account the number of sources of light, the distribution of light at a wavelength, the distribution of light across wavelength, the power output of each light, and the relative “weight” that each wavelength contributes to minimum erythema dose.
  • the distribution of light may follow a Gaussian curve defined by a full width half maximum.
  • FIG. 30 describes a method by which a daily light dose may be calculated from an estimated MED of the patient remnant dose from prior treatments and subtracting the remnant dose from the prior treatments to determine a dose for that day.
  • the calculation of the remnant dose may be a continuous function that is non-linear. Calculation of the remnant dose may be done using the amount of the prior doses, the time from last dose, the prior remnant dose and various patient characteristics such as previous light exposure, skin type, ethnicity, location of the lesions, age, skin pigmentation, etc. Photoadaptation may be defined as the diminished future response to equivalent doses of irradiation. It is most often estimated in vivo by looking at changes in the minimal erythema dose with subsequent doses of UV radiation.
  • the remnant dose calculation may be a continuous function that is non-linear.
  • the daily dose may be calculated when dose are missed based on a continuous function adapted from American Academy of Dermatology Guidelines.
  • FIG. 31 describes in a detailed flow chart illustrating how a daily light dose may be determined by calculating the estimated MED of the patient remnant dose from prior treatments and then subtracting the remnant dose from the prior treatments to calculate the dose for that day.
  • the apparatus e.g., control logic, e.g., in the applicator software and/or the applicator
  • the apparatus may calculate the does time and control the applicator to transmit the appropriate light dose based on the remnant dose (e.g., a remnant dose multiplier), estimated from the time since the last dose (based on a clock of the processor controlling the applicator and/or based on the applicator, or a stored time/date stamp), as well as an estimate of the minimal erythema dose.
  • User input e.g., burn/no burn
  • burn/no burn may also be used.
  • FIG. 32 shows a sample graph used to calculate current dose using a non-linear multiplier times prior dose based on the time from the last dose, determined as illustrated in FIG. 31 .
  • FIG. 33 shows a sample graph used to calculate current remnant dose using a non-linear multiplier times prior dose+prior remnant dose and the time from the last dose.
  • FIG. 34 describes a method by which the apparatus (including control logic) determining the daily dose also determines the MED and photoadaptation rate of the patient where the first sensitization gives current MED and provides an estimates photoadaptation rate, the second sensitization resets MED and gives photoadaptation rate, the third sensitization sets the photoadaptation limit and subsequent sensitizations resets the photoadaptation limit by lowering by the photoadaptation rate.
  • FIG. 36 shows a distribution of LEDs at 2 different wavelengths in a single light source, including a plurality of 310 nm LED and a 303 nm LED.
  • FIG. 37 shows a calculation of how to “dose balance” multiple light sources at different center wavelengths in order to provide equal contribution to minimum erythema dose by taking into account the number of sources of light, the distribution of light at a wavelength, the distribution of light across wavelength, the power output of each light and the relative “weight” each wavelength contributes to minimum erythema dose.
  • the relative collimation of the light sources may also be used to provide the weighting between them. Thus an LED that is less collimated, decreasing the depth of light penetration, would be considered weaker than an LED that was more collimate, having an increased depth of penetration.
  • any of the apparatuses and methods described herein may provide dose balancing using multiple LEDs at different center wavelengths of light based on the relative contribution of each wavelength towards an erythemic dose.
  • This may use the MED for different wavelengths from a monochromatic light source.
  • the apparatus may otherwise be somewhat limited by the creation of erythema, the dose from each LED may be adjusted to contribute equally towards erythema. Without proper balancing, one source may cause erythema and the other source may not, making the overall dose less efficient. Since LEDs are fundamentally multi-chromatic, following a Gaussian distribution around a center wavelength and each wavelength has a different relative contribution to MED, this estimation for dose balancing must be adjusted accordingly.
  • the apparatuses and methods for determining dose described herein may be configured so that every time a treatment is initiated (e.g., each time the patient presses “start treatment”) this may be considered a dose. If the patient receives only a partial dose, then this partial dose is still considered a dose for purposes of determining the overall dose and setting the next dose. In some variations the apparatus may track the number of full doses delivered. Thus, the apparatus may take into account the amount of time it has been since the last dose, which may be called out as the remnant multiplier. If a patient gets interrupted halfway through their dose but completes the dose right away, then the combination of both doses is considered one dose. The applicator may communicate the dose delivered to the controller (control logic, e.g., on a smartphone or other controller).
  • the controller control logic, e.g., on a smartphone or other controller.
  • the control logic may send the right time to the applicator, but the applicator may communicate back to the control logic (e.g., the app on a smartphone) the amount of time that was delivered. This may provide a more robust signaling protocol. Every time that a connection is established between the applicator and the control logic (e.g., the smartphone), the applicator will tell the control logic the amount of time the light was on for the last lesion. The control logic may then use this data to calculate the next dose. Any number of lesions may be treated and tracked in this manner, including e.g., 2 or more, 3 or more, etc. (up to 200, 100, 30, etc.).
  • Each lesion may be covered by a dressing and/or surrounded by a frame (magnetic frame) for mating to the applicator.
  • a single applicator (and associated control logic) may be used to treat multiple lesions and mate with multiple dressings/frames.
  • the control logic may track treatment of each lesion.
  • Table 2 illustrates one method of determining the dose of a lesion as discussed above.
  • FULL DOSE GIVEN DURING PRIOR DOSE Cannot do another
  • any of the methods for calculating a dose for light therapy described herein may use an estimate of the amount of light that would cause a sensitization or redness in the patient's skin, and may include subtracting a portion of that estimate based on the remaining healing time from previous doses.
  • the remaining healing time may be based on a non-linear continuous function with inputs of time and dose, as described above.
  • the previous doses may be those doses within the last 3 days (e.g., within the last 1 day, within the last 2 days, within the last 4 days, within the last 5 days, within the last 6 days, within the last 7 days, etc.).
  • the previous doses may be the doses within the last 52 hours (e.g., within the last 48 hours, within the last 42 hours, within the last 36 hours, within the last 30 hours, within the last 24 hours, within the last 58 hours, etc.).
  • any of the apparatuses for treating skin disorders described herein may be configured to compute/predict the dose, including using the recent past dose information (e.g., within the last 24 hours, 30 hours, 36 hours, 42 hours, 48 hours, 52 hours, 58 hours, etc.).
  • an apparatus may include: a phototherapy unit, a dermal patch with a minimum of a hydrogel and coal tar, non-transient control logic for controlling a processor to use one or more independent variables of time since last dose and time duration of last dose to determine the current dose time duration.
  • any of the methods described herein may include methods for calculating the time of current dose of dermal light therapy through a dressing.
  • any of these method may include a non-linear function with all or some of the following 5 independent variables: time of previous doses, size of previous doses, radiance of light, transmission of dressing and presence of skin sensitivity or redness from previous doses.
  • Any of the methods described herein may include an estimation of the dose time duration that would cause skin sensitization or redness and subtracts a portion of that time based on the estimated remaining healing time required as a result of previous doses.
  • a hydrogel dressing (e.g., “patch”) may be part of a system including a light applicator and/or a frame to which the dressing may attach (as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B ). Either the frame or the dressing may include magnets for coupling to the light applicator.
  • the hydrogel dressing may be an approximately 2.5′′ ⁇ 1.25′′ hydrogel with a thin film 0.75′′ border , ⁇ 4% coal tar, and may be somewhat moisture occlusive (e.g., having an MVTR ⁇ x g/cm 2 /24hours). The dressing may be low or no-odor because of the occlusive properties.
  • the dressing may include an occlusive boarder (e.g., a wax/hydrocolloid) around the hydrogel to prevent odor escaping out the sides of the patch.
  • an occlusive boarder e.g., a wax/hydrocolloid
  • the dressing may be worn for 3-7 days continuously, and may be UVA blocking (e.g., to protect against coal tar photosensitization to UVA light).
  • the dressing may include a thin hydrophobic layer between the hydrogel and the skin to reduce absorption of compounds for the skin that block UV light.
  • the dressing may include an oleophobic (or lipophobic) layer/coating between the hydrogel and the polyurethane minimize the amount of coal tar absorbed by the polyurethane thin film (which is oleophillic, meaning it likes to absorb coal tar).
  • a therapeutic light applicator may include one two light modules (e.g. squares of 1.25′′) connected with a small electric cable and a hinge for an effective therapy area of 2.5′′ ⁇ 1.25′′ with a UV blocking skirt.
  • the “skirt” may contain a “living hinge” for flexing conforming to body curvatures (e.g., 180 degrees of flex, between 210-90 degrees of flex, etc.) and connects the two LED 1.25′′ ⁇ 1.25′′ modules while preventing light from escaping from the treatment area.
  • the inner surfaces of the UV blocking skirt may be coated in reflective coating along with the bottom of the LED board to distribute light.
  • any of these apparatuses may include a wireless communication circuit (e.g., a Bluetooth connection), e.g., on the LED board, with a wired connection to a battery (e.g., a LIPO battery back w/micro USB charger).
  • the circuitry e.g., a rigid board
  • the LEDs for emitting the UV light may be laid out in any appropriate pattern.
  • the LEDs may be laid out so that 4 ⁇ 2 LEDs at a wavelength of 307+/ ⁇ 3 nm are arranged within the light emitting region.
  • 4 ⁇ 2 LEDs at a wavelength of 308+/ ⁇ 3 nm and 2 ⁇ 1 LED at a wavelength of 303+/ ⁇ 3 may be arranged within the light emitting region(s).
  • the LED positions may be optimized by distance and location on board for equal distribution of light across skin surface.
  • the apparatus may include one or more lenses on the LEDs and/or reflectors on LEDs to distribute light across skin surface and/or collimate light for optimized absorption in skin surface.
  • any of these apparatuses may include temperature sensor for feedback to the microcontroller to optimize the amount of energy supplied to the LEDs.
  • any of these apparatuses may include an IR proximity sensor and Hall Effect sensors to detect proximity to a surface and connection to the magnets on the dressing. Both may be used, as discussed above, in conjunction in order to detect a dressing since the Hall Effect sensors only detect a change in the magnetic field.
  • the light emitting region may be any appropriate shape, including square, rectangular, oval, circular, triangular, etc.
  • the apparatus may be configured to plug multiple lights into the same battery pack.
  • the control logic controlling the apparatus may generally be configured to determine an initial dose, M x , may be based on minimal erythema dose (MED), prior treatment history, location of plaque on body, gender, age, ethnicity, skin pigmentation, skin type, plaque thickness and confidence of estimated MED. Based on input information and confidence of estimated MED is high, the starting dose will be more aggressive and close to MED ( ⁇ 90% for example) but if confidence in estimated MED is low, the starting dose will be more conservative ( ⁇ 70% of estimated MED, for example). Each time patient enters that their skin is not sensitive from prior dose, the dose may be increased until a sensitization occurs. The last dose that did not create a sensitization reaction may then be set as the MED.
  • MED minimal erythema dose
  • M′ x is gradually increased each time. For instances if M′ 1 is 6% the second dose will be 106% of the initial dose. The increase of M′ x is called M′′. If M′′ is 1%, then M′ 2 is 106.06%. M′ 3 is 106.1206′′ and so on.
  • the control logic may track and regulate each lesion specifically and/or separately. For example, a patient with eight lesions may have all eight lesions tracked separately (and the light controlled separately) for each lesion. In some variations the control logic may determine which lesion corresponds to which dressing.
  • the apparatuses described herein may also take and track images of the lesions.
  • the control logic (app) can take and display images of lesion with an option to re-take image or rate if lesion is better or worse than previous.
  • the control logic e.g., app
  • User information such as MED, location of plaque on body, gender, age, ethnicity, skin pigmentation, skin type, plaque thickness can be entered into control logic along with how variable for determining the dose increase.
  • the apparatuses may be made available in different sizes and/or shapes.
  • a small size may be 1′′ ⁇ 1′′ and may have a single magnet in the middle (instead of at the four corners).
  • a larger size may be 5′′ ⁇ 5′′ and may be flexibility in two planes (e.g., 4 2.5′′ ⁇ 2.5′′ light modules with living hinges).
  • the dressing may be comfortable for occlusive treatment of skin conditions with medicaments, especially psoriasis, vitiligo and dermatitis.
  • these dressing may pass UVB light by putting UV absorbing medicament in suspension or orientating it in parallel with light, and may block UVA light.
  • the control logic may set time of exposure based on local UV index.
  • the dressing may include a strong, non-damaging attachment to the skin and may deliver a consistent dose of coal tar over a multi-day wear. These dressing may be low- or no-odor, and may be generally worn for 5 days of wear (or longer).
  • the outer surface may include a UVB permeable thin fabric cover.
  • dressings including a medicament that are both UV blocking and UVA photosensitizing in suspension in hydrophilic gel at a concentration of less than 10% that passes UVB light and blocks UVA light.
  • the UVA blocking material may be, for example, HEXYL 2-[4-(DIETHYLAMINO)-2-HYDROXYBENZO.
  • the dressing may be UVB transparent while in contact with the skin.
  • the dressing may be treated to stop or limit absorption of UV absorbing components from sweat, e.g., by adding a thin hydrophobic layer between the hydrogel and the skin.
  • a thin film may be positioned on top of the hydrogel that is UVB clear and chemically inert to coal tar like a fluorosilicone or Teflon based film to prevent compounds from degrading the UV transparency of the top layer of the dressing.
  • the dressing may also include an antiperspirants layer between the hydrogel and the skin to stop exudate of UV absorbing components from the skin. Any of these dressings may be configured to remove or limit UV absorbing components that may be released from the skin (e.g., detritus, sweat, oils).
  • any of these apparatuses may compensate for UVB transparency lost by placing a UVB detector in the therapeutic light applicator, in some variations along with a small UV reflector (e.g., Mylar or other material) on the underside of the dressing.
  • the medicament e.g., coal tar
  • the medicament may be arranged in one or more orientations within the hydrogel (e.g., aggregating the coal tar in specific patterns in the hydrogel, using micro needles to insert the coal tar in pillars, using a magnetizing material mixed with the coal tar, e.g., iron oxide, with a strong magnetic field to orientate the coal tar in pillars, etc.).
  • Light may be effectively delivered to the scalp even in the presence of hair and the absorbing medicament (e.g., coal tar) by using one or more of the features described herein.
  • the dressing may be attached to the light applicator with rigid rods at corners to stabilize the light against the scalp, with internal semi rigid light guides that move as the attachment is lightly rotated on the scalp to part the hair and spread the light evenly, etc.
  • a conveyor belt attachment with bristles in alternating orientations may create parts in the hair and guide the light evenly across the scalp.
  • the contact between the dressing and the applicator may be sensed by, for example, measuring change in the magnetic field when a small magnet (on dressing) comes in contact with large magnet (from light applicator) by one or more of: adding a “concentrator” consisting of a ferromagnetic strip that extends, e.g., at least 0.5′′ from the small magnet on the dressing with a hall effect sensor positioned above the end of the ferromagnetic strip (farthest away from magnets) in vertical alignment with axis of magnetic field.
  • the strip may be folded at the end closest to the Hall Effect sensor increases the change in the magnetic field.
  • a Hall Effect sensor may be orientated horizontal to the axis of the magnetic field and positioned on the bottom of the large magnet closest to the small magnet.
  • a MIRC ink and reader may be used. Flux sensitivity within centerline of the magnet may be read by the device and may activate when all 4 magnets are doubled (the apparatus may include an upper limit as well to from large B fields from turning them on).
  • a reflector on surface of the dressing and small receiver may be used to confirm contact.
  • an alternative to the dressing described herein may include a spray-on material, e.g., including a coal tar occlusive coating may be delivered directly to the scalp.
  • a siloxane may be mixed with coal tar that gels on contact with the skin through a combination of more than one compound.
  • a comb finger pump delivery may be used.
  • a reservoir of gel including the medicament may be pumped into a needle applicator (e.g., into a plurality of teeth of the comb); the medicament may include an anti-itch material as well.
  • adjacent comb channels may combine materials (e.g., forming the hydrogel). The mix may activate quickly to seal, and protect treatment but remains active to natural occurring UV.
  • any of the medicaments described herein may include a melanin reducing agent to reduce the effect of photoadaptation.
  • examples of such agents may include: Alpha Arbutin; Tego Cosmo C; Kojic Acid; Gigawhite; Licorice Extract; Niacinamide (Vitamin B3); Sodium Ascorbyl Phosphate (Vitamin C); Mulberry Extract; Bearberry Extract; Lemon Juice Extract, etc.
  • Any of these apparatuses may also include a magnetic attachment of the dressing to a base layer.
  • a ferromagnetic material may be arranged on the base layer of the dressing that is outside of a treatment area of the occlusive patch.
  • the dressing may include magnets that are slightly larger than the ferromagnetic material to allow movement of the patch magnet relative to the base layer as the skin moves.
  • the dressing may be UVA blocking but UVB passing.
  • the dressings may be secured stably against the skin between doses.
  • An apparatus such as the one shown in FIGS. 4A or 4B may therefore be particularly useful.
  • the dressing may be divided up into a frame portion 402 (base) that may secure to the skin in a stable manner and may include one or more magnets for holding the light applicator and/or a medicament-holding patch (removable center 404 ).
  • the medicament-containing patch 404 when treating the skin with the light, the medicament-containing patch 404 may be removed and replaced with the light; the base 402 remains stable on the body.
  • the base includes an open center region (base 402 ) with high adhesion for multi-day wear, and may also include one or more magnetic (e.g., ferromagnetic) alignment features for coupling with a light source and/or a patch containing a medicament.
  • the patch may be a semi-permanent occlusive, non-UV transmissive patch, with a medicament center and adhesive. If the placement changes during replacement of the semi-removable base, skin that had not previously been exposed to light may now be exposed. In order to reduce the chances of a burn occurring on this new skin, the inner area of the semi-removable base may have partial transmissivity (10-90%) to light of 0.1 to 1 cm in width. This would expose the surrounding tissue to a partial dose of light and reduce the chances of a burn occurring if it was exposed after a dressing change.
  • the daily dose of UVB light may be applied to a target area that increases daily.
  • the penumbra of light exposure to tissue on the inside of the base dressing may prepare the surrounding skin.
  • the edge of the frame or base (or dressing) may have a tapering transmission of UV light, rather than an abrupt blocking of light. This may ease the edge-effects that would otherwise occur (e.g. burning of naive skin) if the frame/dressing shifts slightly on the skin, or when a new frame/dressing is applied.
  • Attachment of the occlusive dressing (and/or the patch portion) may be done with an adhesive such as a hydrocolloid, or silicone, and the dressing (and/or patch portion) may include one or more non-tacky regions that may allow the semi-permanent occlusive patch to be removed easily.
  • Any of the methods (including user interfaces) described herein may be implemented as software, hardware or firmware, and may be described as a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing a set of instructions capable of being executed by a processor (e.g., computer, tablet, smartphone, etc.), that when executed by the processor causes the processor to control perform any of the steps, including but not limited to: displaying, communicating with the user, analyzing, modifying parameters (including timing, frequency, radiance and/or power over skin area, etc.), determining, alerting, or the like.
  • a processor e.g., computer, tablet, smartphone, etc.
  • references to a structure or feature that is disposed “adjacent” another feature may have portions that overlap or underlie the adjacent feature.
  • spatially relative terms such as “under”, “below”, “lower”, “over”, “upper” and the like, may be used herein for ease of description to describe one element or feature's relationship to another element(s) or feature(s) as illustrated in the figures. It will be understood that the spatially relative terms are intended to encompass different orientations of the device in use or operation in addition to the orientation depicted in the figures. For example, if a device in the figures is inverted, elements described as “under” or “beneath” other elements or features would then be oriented “over” the other elements or features. Thus, the exemplary term “under” can encompass both an orientation of over and under.
  • the device may be otherwise oriented (rotated 90 degrees or at other orientations) and the spatially relative descriptors used herein interpreted accordingly.
  • the terms “upwardly”, “downwardly”, “vertical”, “horizontal” and the like are used herein for the purpose of explanation only unless specifically indicated otherwise.
  • first and second may be used herein to describe various features/elements (including steps), these features/elements should not be limited by these terms, unless the context indicates otherwise. These terms may be used to distinguish one feature/element from another feature/element. Thus, a first feature/element discussed below could be termed a second feature/element, and similarly, a second feature/element discussed below could be termed a first feature/element without departing from the teachings of the present invention.
  • any of the apparatuses and methods described herein should be understood to be inclusive, but all or a sub-set of the components and/or steps may alternatively be exclusive, and may be expressed as “consisting of” or alternatively “consisting essentially of” the various components, steps, sub-components or sub-steps.
  • a numeric value may have a value that is +/ ⁇ 0.1% of the stated value (or range of values), +/ ⁇ 1% of the stated value (or range of values), +/ ⁇ 2% of the stated value (or range of values), +/ ⁇ 5% of the stated value (or range of values), +/ ⁇ 10% of the stated value (or range of values), etc.
  • Any numerical values given herein should also be understood to include about or approximately that value, unless the context indicates otherwise. For example, if the value “10” is disclosed, then “about 10” is also disclosed. Any numerical range recited herein is intended to include all sub-ranges subsumed therein.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Oil, Petroleum & Natural Gas (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Radiation-Therapy Devices (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Material From Animals Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)

Abstract

Compositions, methods and apparatuses for phototherapy to treat skin disorders. In particular, described herein are methods, compositions, phototherapy dressings for use with phototherapy UV light applicators (sources) and phototherapy UV light applicators to treat skin disorders such as psoriasis.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16,076,709, filed Aug. 9, 2018, titled “METHODS, COMPOSITIONS AND APPARATUSES FOR TREATING PSORIASIS BY PHOTOTHERAPY,” which is a national phase application under 35 U.S.C. 371 of International Patent Application No. PCT/US2017/017271, filed Feb. 9, 2017, titled “METHODS, COMPOSITIONS AND APPARATUSES FOR TREATING PSORIASIS BY PHOTOTHERAPY,” now International Patent Application Publication No. WO 2017/139514, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/293,314, titled “METHODS, COMPOSITIONS AND APPARATUSES FOR TREATING PSORIASIS BY PHOTOTHERAPY,” filed on Feb. 9, 2016, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/427,654, titled “METHODS, COMPOSITIONS AND APPARATUSES FOR TREATING PSORIASIS BY PHOTOTHERAPY,” filed on Nov. 29, 2016, each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • This patent may be related to, and/or may be used with the methods, compositions and apparatuses described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/187,614, titled “PHOTOTHERAPY DRESSING FOR TREATING PSORIASIS” filed on Jun. 20, 2016, claiming priority as a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/632,161, also titled “PHOTOTHERAPY DRESSING FOR TREATING PSORIASIS” filed on Feb. 26, 2015, (now U.S. Pat. No. 9,370,449) which claimed priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/944,755, titled “SAFE THERAPEUTIC LIGHT SYSTEM” filed on Feb. 26, 2014 and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/049,366, titled “THERAPEUTIC LIGHT SYSTEM”, filed Sep. 12, 2014. All of these applications are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
  • All publications and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each individual publication or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
  • FIELD
  • Described herein are phototherapy methods, compositions and apparatuses, including medicaments of coal tar, coal tar extract, dressings including such medicaments, methods of using such medicaments, apparatuses (including devices and systems, including software, hardware and/or firmware) for controlling the application of phototherapy, and phototherapy devices including UV light applicators for treating disorders such as psoriasis that are safe and easy to use, including for home use by a patient.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Light, when delivered to the body, has been shown to elicit a wide range of therapeutic effects. Specifically, light can be used as a therapeutic agent for various disorders. Light, in the Ultraviolet (UV) spectrum, may be used as a treatment for skin disorders such as psoriasis, vitiligo, dermatitis, asteatotic, purigo, pruritis, etc. Light therapy is often delivered in a doctor's office or at home in chambers that deliver light to the entire body surface or with smaller light sources for delivery of light to focused areas of the body. Typically, a trained professional is required to deliver the light to ensure that the patient receives the correct dose of light and that sensitive areas, such as the eyes, are not exposed to the light.
  • In a light chamber, the amount of light delivered is based on the amount of time the patient is exposed to light. The light is delivered to the entire body even though the region that requires treatment often composes a fraction of the overall surface area of the body. When receiving this modality of light therapy, the patient must wear protective eyewear to prevent exposure of light to the eyes. If the patient is exposed to more light than intended, cellular damage and/or burns may occur over a large portion of the body, leading to significant discomfort and even medical treatment.
  • Using a focused light solves the issue of light exposure to areas that do not need therapy because the user directs the light to the area where the therapy is needed. When therapy is delivered at home and the user controls where the light is being delivered, there is increased risk of overexposure of one area of the body and underexposure of another area. In addition, the light can be inadvertently directed towards sensitive areas such as the eyes or genitals.
  • Further, there is evidence to show that light therapy treatment for skin disorders has been limited by patient's unwillingness to receive treatment in doctor's offices and lack of adherence to home light therapy systems. Adherence to therapy at home may be improved by increasing patient engagement and improving device ease of use.
  • Light therapy may also be combined with topical treatments. For example, coal tar is used as a therapeutic in conjunction with (though typically not at the same time) as phototherapy. For example, phototherapy with UVB has been used with coal tar (the Goeckerman regimen) as well as with anthralin. The Goeckerman regimen uses daily treatments of 3 to 4 weeks on average. The coal tar or anthralin is applied once or twice each day and then washed off before the procedure. Studies indicate that a low-dose (e.g., 1%) coal tar preparation is as effective as a high-dose (6%) preparation. Such regimens are unpleasant, but are still useful for some patients with severe psoriasis, because they can achieve long-term remission (up to 18 months on average). Treatments involving both UVB and coal tar or other topical drugs typically involve the separate application of the UVB and coal tar, in part because it coal tar is messy, odiferous and blocks or absorbs all or nearly all of the delivered UV light. For this reason, coal tar is often applied after administration of the UVB. Unfortunately, bifurcating treatment in this way complicates the treatment, and may further limit the effectiveness. In addition, the use of a topical agent such as coal tar may be messy and unpleasant, at least in part because of the odor associated with the agent and the use of oil-based agents (e.g., petroleum) solubilizing the coal tar (or coal tar extract).
  • Thus, there is a need for apparatuses and methods for phototherapy, particularly for the treatment of skin disorders such as psoriasis, that are easy to use in even a home environment, and otherwise permit the application of therapeutic light to one or more specific areas of a patient's skin. The apparatuses, compositions, and methods described herein may address these concerns.
  • In addition, it would be beneficial to provide methods of providing phototherapy that permit accurate and effective application of phototherapy every day or every two days (e.g., within approximately 48 hours, or within approximately 24 hours, etc.), or for the application of partial doses, including applying a dose of phototherapy to a patient within a short period of time after a dose phototherapy has been interrupted. Currently such dosing is difficult or impossible in part because it the skin responds dynamically to a phototherapy dose. Typically doses to treat psoriasis (including with coal tar) are applied at or near a minimal erythema dose (MED), and the MED, which it usually determined based on skin type and patient-reported pain/redness, may vary among individuals.
  • In addition, it would be beneficial to provide one or more dressings that may be used with a light therapy (e.g., UV) applicator to hold the applicator at a fixed position (including at a fixed or known distance) from the patient. Described herein are methods and apparatuses that may address these needs.
  • SUMMARY OF THE DISCLOSURE
  • The methods and apparatuses, including devices and systems (including software, firmware and hardware) described herein relate to phototherapy for treatment of a skin disorder, and in particular phototherapy apparatuses and methods for treatment of psoriasis. Any of the methods described herein may be implemented in an apparatus.
  • Thus, described herein are methods and apparatuses for delivering phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder. Any of these methods and apparatuses may include determining one or more therapeutic doses of UV phototherapy (and in some variations, applying). These dosing methods and apparatuses may be used with any of the UV light applicators and/or dressings described herein.
  • In general, a method and apparatus for delivering phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder (such as psoriasis) may include the calculation of a dose using a remnant dose, and the use of the remnant dose to determine a new dose. A remnant dose is particular relevant when a second or additional dose of UV phototherapy is to be applied within a predetermined window of time (e.g., within 60 hours, within 58 hours, within 56 hours, within 54 hours, within 52 hours, within 50 hours, within 48 hours, within 46 hours, within 40 hours, within 36 hours, within 30 hours, within 24 hours, within 18 hours, etc.) of a previous UV phototherapy dose. The remnant dose accounts for the lingering effects of a prior dose within this predetermined window of time (e.g., 52 hours) on the same area of the skin to which a new dose is being prepared. The new dose may be referred to herein as an additional dose, a second dose or a planned dose. The methods and apparatuses described herein may incorporate remnant doses due to more than one prior dose within the predetermined time period (e.g., two prior doses, three prior doses, etc.). The inventors have found and herein described that within a finite window of time following a therapeutically effective phototherapy dose (e.g., typically between about 50%-100% of the MED), a subsequent dose must account for the residual effects of that previous dose(s) made within this finite window in order to be effective without creating local sensitization of the skin. Thus, a subsequent therapeutically effective dose (a planned dose) may account for the residual dose.
  • In determining a planned dose when dosing more often than the predetermined time (e.g., 52 hours, 48 hours, etc.) any of the methods and apparatuses described herein may use the time from the last dose, as well as the prior dose, e.g., an estimate of the prior dose, such as the energy delivered per area to the patient's skin. The prior dose may be estimated (e.g., the value of the energy applied to the same UV light source to treat the skin), calculated, or measured (e.g., at the skin). An estimate of the energy delivered per area of a prior dose may correspond to: light output (W/m2)*treatment time (s)=Energy Delivered per Area (J/m2). Thus, the methods described herein may refer to the the energy delivered per unit area of light energy (e.g., UV light energy within the 300-320 nm range) delivered as a prior (or “first”) dose or doses of UV radiation energy per area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin. As mentioned, any of the dressings described herein may be used for the application of light energy and the dose may include an estimation of the energy delivered through the dressing; specifically through a window on the dressing that is configured to pass UV light. Any of the methods and apparatuses described herein may account for the passage of light through the dressing, e.g., by including a UV attenuation factor for the dressing. It is a particular advantage of the dressings described herein that they may hold a UV light source (applicator) a fixed, constant and known distance from the skin and may direct the light through the dressing(s), in addition to allowing for re-application of the UV therapy to the same region of the skin.
  • In any of the methods and apparatuses described herein, when determining the dose to be applied (particularly when a prior dose was delivered within 52 hours), the remnant dose may be estimated using the time since the prior dose as well as an estimate of the prior dose(s) (e.g., the energy delivered per area, or the power applied to the illuminator for a particular dressing on the body, etc., or equivalent values); a non-linear decay curve may be applied to estimate the remnant dose from the prior dose(s). The non-linear decay curve represents the remnant dose function over time for time less than the predetermined window (e.g., less than 52 hours). Thus, the remnant dose is the sum or all prior doses within the window (e.g., <52 hours) where each prior dose is the product of the remnant dose function (at the time since the prior dose based on the time the new dose is to be applied) and the prior dose. This remnant dose can then be subtracted from a target dose, which may also be referred to as a therapeutically effective target dose. In general, the target dose may be determined based on the MED for the patient's skin. MED may be determined by estimation (eMED or estimated MED, e.g., based on skin type or other well-known factors), such as using the Fitzpatrick scale, or by empirical measurements (e.g., to determine the threshold dose for redness/pain, etc.). A target does may be a percentage of MED or eMED (such as between about 70% and 100% of MED/eMED) and when the target dose is part of a series of sequential doses, it may also account for photoadaptation, by including a scaling factor that increases over time (e.g., the target dose may be a percentage (e.g., 70%-100%) of MED or eMED plus the photoadaptation, adding, for example between 2%-20% (e.g., 6%) of the MED per each day during the dosing series.
  • Any of these methods and apparatuses may confirm and/or track the location of the applied dose on a patient's skin. The remnant dose may be specific to a particular region of the patient's skin, and different remnant doses may be estimated at different locations. The methods and apparatus described herein may therefore track, record and apply the locations and timing of doses applied to different skin regions.
  • In general, the use of a remnant dose when determining a second phototherapy dose when the second dose is to be applied within a short predetermined (e.g., 52 hour) time period is quite different from methods for determining a second dose after this predetermined time period in which only include photoadaptation of the patient's skin. To account for photoadaptation, the subsequent dose (if made within 3-7 days) will typically be increased compared to the prior dose(s). In contrast, the methods described herein decrease the subsequent doses by an amount based on the residual dose(s), when the subsequent dose is applied within the predetermined time period (e.g., <52 hours), although it may also include/account for photoadaptation. Thus during the window period, a subsequent dose may result in a lower dose being applied in some cases.
  • As described in greater detail herein, the target dosing may be based on the estimated or approximated MED for a patient, in which the therapeutically appropriate does is around the MED/eMED. For example, if the first dose (Dose 1) is D1 which is some percentage of MED/eMED (e.g., between about 70-100% of MED/eMED); an estimated second target dose (Dt) may be: D1 plus D1*a photoadaptation percent (%, typically between about 2% and 20%), as long as the second dose is going to occur within a week (otherwise the photoadaptation percentage may be set to zero. When the second dose is delivered within the predetermined remnant window (e.g., 52 hours), the second dose to be delivered may also include a term accounting for the remnant dose. If the second dose occurs after the remnant window (e.g., >52 hours), the remnant dose is presumed to have fallen off sufficiently to be ignored. The photoadaptation percent for a patient may be estimated or calculated and may be, e.g., between 1% and 20% (e.g., between 2% and 12%, e.g., 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, etc.). The remnant dose (Dr(x)) is a function of time since the prior dose. For example, Dr(x)=Fr(T)*Dt(x−1), where T is the time between the new, target, dose and the prior dose and Fr(T) is the remnant dose function over time and Dt(x−1) is the prior target dose. Thus, the dose to be delivered as an effective dose should be the difference between the target dose, Dt(x), and the remnant dose, Dr(x). As just described, the target dose (target effective dose) may be the prior effective dose plus an accounting for photoadaptation (e.g. prior dose*photoadaptaion %). Thus, a subsequent effective dose within the predetermined remnant window (e.g., 52 hours) may include an estimate of the increased in dose due to photoadaptation over time (compared to the initial MED/eMED).
  • Thus, Dt(x−1) corresponds to the prior “target dose” (which may be different from the prior delivered delivered dose). For example, assume that dose 1 (D1) is 100 mJ/cm2, which may be determined initially to be near the MED/eMED (e.g., 90% of an MED/eMED) for the patient. The second target dose Dt(x), may therefore be 106 mJ/cm2, when the dose is to be delivered at 24 hours from the first dose, assuming a photoadaptation percentage of 6%. Thus the target dose, Dt(2) is D1+6%(D1) or 106 mJ/cm2. Since the second dose will be delivered at 24 hours (<52 hours), to determine the dose to be delivered the residual dose should be subtracted from the target dose. At 24 hours, the residual dose function indicates that 37% of the prior target dose (in this case, 100 mJ/cm2) should be subtracted from the second target dose. Thus subtracting the 37 mJ/cm2 remnant dose from the target dose gives the delivered dose (the dose to be delivered) as 106−37=69 mJ/cm2. When the third dose is delivered within 24 hours from the second dose, the third remnant dose is the second targeted dose (106 mJ/cm2) times 37%. Thus, the remnant dose is calculated off the prior targeted dose, giving a remnant dose for the third dose of 39.2 mJ/cm2. To calculate the 3rd dose, this third remnant dose is based on the 2nd target dose and subtracted from the third target dose (e.g., 112.4 mJ/cm2−39.2 mJ/cm2 or 73.1 mJ/cm2).
  • In any of the methods described herein, the increased target dose due to photoadaptation may be increased at each subsequent dosing (time) by a certain amount, such as 1% (e.g., 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5% ,6%, etc.) Thus, the first photoadaptation for a dose after 24 hours may be 6%, the next dose may be increased to 6.06% (a 1% increase), the the next does may be increased to 6.12%, etc.
  • For example, described herein are methods of delivering a UV phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder, the method comprising: delivering a first dose of UV radiation at a first energy per unit area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin; determining a second dose of UV radiation to be delivered to the predetermined location at a second time within 52 hours from the first dose by estimating, in a processor, a remnant dose, based on the first dose and a time since the first dose, and subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose to get the second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than or equal to the first dose; and delivering the second dose to the predetermined location.
  • For example, a method of delivering a UV phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder, may include: delivering a first dose of UV radiation at a first energy per unit area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin; determining a second dose of UV radiation to be delivered to the predetermined location at a second time within 52 hours from the first dose by estimating, in a processor, a remnant dose, based on the first energy per unit area and time since the first dose, and a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose, and subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose to get the second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than or equal to the first dose; and communicating the second dose from the processor to a UV light source on the predetermined location; and delivering the second dose to the predetermined location.
  • A method of delivering a UV phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder may include: delivering a first dose of UV radiation at a first energy per unit area to a predetermined location on the subject's skin, through a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent and that comprises a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 10% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel; determining a second dose of UV radiation to be delivered to the predetermined location at a second time within 52 hours from the first dose by estimating, in a processor, a remnant dose, based on the first energy per unit area and time since the first dose, and a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose, and subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose to get the second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than or equal to the first dose; and delivering the second dose to the predetermined location through the phototherapy dressing.
  • In any of these methods (or apparatuses implementing them) the dose (first and second, etc. dose) may be delivered through a phototherapy dressing that is at least partially UV transparent (in the 300-320 nm range) and may include a coal tar or coal tar extract directly on the dressing. Other medicaments may be used with any of these methods, either in the dressing or otherwise (e.g., orally delivered, etc.). For example, any of these methods may include delivering the first dose, and subsequent dose(s), through a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent and that comprises a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 10% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel. In general, delivering the dose (e.g., prior/first dose, and any subsequent doses) may comprises delivering the first dose from a UV light source mounted a predetermined distance from the subject's skin. For example, delivering the first dose may comprise delivering the first dose from a UV light source positioned a predetermined distance from the subject's skin and further wherein the processor is in communication with the UV light source.
  • Thus, any of the methods described herein may include attaching a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent and comprises a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 10% (e.g., between 0.05% and 7.5%, between 0.1% and 5%, etc.) coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel over the predetermined location on the subject's skin and delivering the first and second dose through the phototherapy dressing.
  • Determining the second dose may comprise determining the the remnant dose based on a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose. Determining the second dose may comprise estimating the remnant dose based on the first energy per unit area of the first dose as well as the time since the first dose. Determining the second dose may comprise estimating the a remnant dose based on the first energy per unit area of the first dose as well as the time since the first dose, and a non-linear decay curve using the time since the first dose. Determining the second dose may comprise subtracting the remnant dose from a target second dose, wherein the target second dose is greater than the first dose and is a product of the first dose and a percentage of photoadaptation of the skin, wherein the percentage of photoadaptation is between, e.g., 1% and 20% (e.g., 2% and 12%, 4% and 10%, etc.).
  • Any of the method described herein may also include determining the remnant dose by multiplying the first dose by a remnant dose multiplier based on the time since the first dose.
  • For any of these methods, the amount of the dose being calculated may account for the UV transmission/absorption of any dressing through which the light is being applied. For example, the first dose may be determined based on the UV light emitted a UV light source delivering light to the skin and the amount of light absorbed by the dressing. Similarly, the estimate of the dose to be applied through the dressing may account for the UV energy lost through the dressing (e.g., by multiplying by a factor corresponding to the transmissivity/absorption of the dressing, such as a Dressing attenuation %, between 30% and 95%, for example).
  • In general the dressing described herein may be referred to as UV transparent (or semi-transparent) patches, bandages, or dressings. In particular, these dressings may include a coal tar or coal tar extract. In general, as described in applicant's U.S. Pat. No. 9,370,449, coal tar and coal tar extract are not UV transparent. Even small amounts of coal tar or coal tar extract (e.g., 0.025% or more) may inhibit or block most or all of the UV transmission in the therapeutic range of 300-320 nm. Thus, bandages including coal tar, even in a hydrogel, may not be UV transparent, or may lose their UV transparency as the coal tar or coal tar extract diffuses into the dressing and/or interacts with one or more dressing component, such as the hydrogel and any otherwise UV transparent layers. Described herein are dressings that may include coal tar/coal tar extract formulations and arrangements that may have enhanced UV transmission properties and longer-term stability, allowing their storage (shelf-life) and longer term usage.
  • For example, described herein are methods and apparatuses that may include a hydrogel into which a coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged (e.g., as globules/microglobules, typically between 10-100 μm diameter, distributed throughout the hydrogel, and/or arranged in clusters, columns, rows, lines, etc.). The coal tar may be held within the hydrogel, and may be limited from dissolving or absorbing (or solubilizing) into the hydrogel by including an agent (e.g., such as a high concentration of MgCl2 without sorbitol). The hydrogel may be formed and maintained in the dressing in a manner to prevent shrinking/pulling of the dressing in the plane of the hydrogel, particularly as the hydrogel dries (e.g., during use). Further, any of these apparatuses (e.g., dressings) may include a protective layer or sheet over the hydrogel that protect the hydrogel, yet maintains the UV transparency of the overall dressing while remaining inert and occlusive to dehydration and the like.
  • Surprisingly, materials commonly used, including those purported to be UV transparent and inert, are not suitable for use in the dressings described herein having a hydrogel with coal tar and/or coal tar extract, either because they are not sufficiently UV transparent or because their UV transparency (e.g., within the range of 300-320 nm) changes over time with exposure to the other components of the dressing and/or the body. For example, films of LDPE (Low-density polyethylene), PU (polyurethane), PE (polyethylene), PET (Polyethylene terephthalate), PVC (Polyvinyl chloride), most Silicones, LLDPE (Linear low-density polyethylene), TPU (Thermoplastic polyurethane), EVA (Ethylene-vinyl acetate), and many rubber blends, and blends of any of these materials lose their UV transmissivity after exposer to many common environmental compounds.
  • However, described herein are UV transparent, occlusive, inert layers that may be used to form part of the UV transparent region of a dressing to maintain UV transparency and low-odor of the dressing. These materials may be elastic or relatively stiff (and may be creased, or may include flexing, bent, creased, fan-folded, folded, etc.) regions to prevent them to flex as they are applied to body surfaces). In general, these materials are resistant to acids, bases, volatile organic compounds (VOCs), and in particular coal tar/coal tar extract. Inert, as used herein, may refer to chemically inert materials, and may also specifically refer to materials that do not substantially change their UV transparency in response to prolonged (e.g., 100 hours or more) of exposure to acids, bases, and VOCs, including coal tar/coal tar extracts. Described herein are materials, including in particular some fluoropolymers/fluorocarbons, such as ETFE (Ethylene tetrafluoroethylene, particularly “Tefzel”) which are thin (e.g., have a thickness less than about 0.005 inches) and are UV clear.
  • For example, described herein are UV transparent dressings for treating a skin disorder by light therapy. These dressing may include: a base configured to be worn on the skin, the base region having an adhesive bottom surface, the base further forming a window region; a hydrogel layer extending across the window region; a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract within the hydrogel, wherein the micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact are present at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel; a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the base; and a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window region in contact with the hydrogel layer, wherein the vapor occlusive barrier comprises a material that is chemically compatible with a compatible compounds, and does not change its UV transparency by more than 10% when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds; further wherein the the dressing passes greater than 20% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm through the vapor occlusive barrier and hydrogel layer.
  • In general, the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be a thin film; in some variations the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier comprises a coating.
  • As mentioned, the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be any appropriate material that is UV transparent to greater than 75% (e.g., greater than 80%, greater than 85%, greater than 90%, etc.) and does not change its UV transparency over time with exposure to acids, bases or VOCs (including coal tar). For example, the barrier may be formed of a fluoropolymer. The UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may comprise ethylene tetrafluoroethylene (ETFE). In some variations, the UV transparent layer does not change its UV transparency by more than 5% when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds; in some variations, the UV transparent layer does not change its UV transparency by more than 2% when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds. The UV transparent layer may not change its UV transparency by more than 10% (e.g., 7.5%, 5%, etc.) when exposed to the compatible compounds after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compounds comprises: acetylsalicylic acid, ascorbic acid, aluminum hydroxide, salicylic acid, ammonium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, sodium hyphochlorite, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, benzene, formaldehyde, chloroflourocarbons, alcohols, coal tar, creosotes, ammonia nitrate, uric acid, urocanic acid, hydrogen peroxide, naptholene, sulfates, phenols, p-amino benzoic acid, and pyridoxine.
  • In general, the dressing may pass 30% or more (e.g., 35% or more, 40% or more, 45% or more, 50% or more, 55% or more, 60% or more, 65% or more, 70% or more, 75% or more, etc.) of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm through the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier and hydrogel layer. The coal tar (e.g., globules or micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact) may have a uniform diameter that varies less than about 50%.
  • In general, the hydrogel may be coupled to the base in a manner that prevents the hydrogel from contracting in the plane of the hydrogel (e.g. in the x, y plane) and thickening in the z plane. For example, the hydrogel may be mechanically secured and prevented from contracting in the x, y plane. In some variations the the scrim layer is configured as a border extending into and beyond an outer perimeter of the hydrogel layer; the scrim layer may be configured to prevent the hydrogel from contracting. For example, the scrim layer may extend from the hydrogel and may be configured to prevent contraction of the hydrogel in a plane of the hydrogel.
  • Any of the dressing described herein may be configured to attach or couple to a UV light source (e.g. holding the light source in a fixed position relative to the dressing and therefore the patient's skin). For example, the dressing may include one or more magnetic or mechanical contacts on the base configured to couple with a UV light source.
  • The window region of the dressing may be any appropriate size and shape. For example, the window may be square, rectangular, triangular, oval, round, donut-shaped, etc. The window region may have an area of between about 0.25 and 49 square inches.
  • As will be described in greater detail below, the coal tar/coal tar extract may be arranged in a plurality of columns or lines within the hydrogel. In general herein, unless the context makes it clear otherwise, coal tar may refer to coal tar or coal tar extract or a combination of both; similarly “coal tar or coal tar extract” may include combinations of coal tar and coal tar extract.
  • As mentioned, the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be configured to allow for articulation or stretching over a bending anatomy; for example, the barrier may include one or more folds allowing the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier to stretch without permanent deformation. The UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may have any appropriate thickness. For example, the barrier may have a thickness of less than 0.005 inches. The UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may transmit 90% or more UV light between 300-320 nm.
  • For example, a UV transparent dressing for treating a skin disorder by light therapy may include: a base configured to be worn on the skin, the base region having an adhesive bottom surface, the base further forming a window region; a hydrogel layer extending across the window region; a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract within the hydrogel, wherein the micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact are present at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel; a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the base; and a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window region in contact with the hydrogel layer, wherein the vapor occlusive barrier comprises a fluoropolymer material that is chemically compatible with a compatible compound, and does not change its UV transparency by more than 5% when exposed to the compatible compound after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compound comprises: acetylsalicylic acid, ascorbic acid, aluminum hydroxide, salicylic acid, ammonium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, sodium hyphochlorite, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, benzene, formaldehyde, chloroflourocarbons, alcohols, coal tar, creosotes, ammonia nitrate, uric acid, urocanic acid, hydrogen peroxide, naptholene, sulfates, phenols, p-amino benzoic acid, and pyridoxine; further wherein the the dressing passes greater than 20% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm through the vapor occlusive barrier and hydrogel layer.
  • A UV transparent dressing for treating a skin disorder by light therapy may include: a base configured to be worn on the skin, the base region having an adhesive bottom surface, the base further forming a window region, and the base region comprising a magnetic or mechanical contact configured to couple with a UV light source; a hydrogel layer extending across the window region; a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract within the hydrogel, wherein the micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar exact are present at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel; a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the base; and a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window region in contact with the hydrogel layer, wherein the vapor occlusive barrier comprises a fluoropolymer material that is chemically compatible with a compatible compound, and does not change its UV transparency by more than 5% when exposed to the compatible compound after 100 hours or more of exposure at room temperature, wherein the compatible compound comprises: acetylsalicylic acid, ascorbic acid, aluminum hydroxide, salicylic acid, ammonium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, sodium hyphochlorite, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, benzene, formaldehyde, chloroflourocarbons, alcohols, coal tar, creosotes, ammonia nitrate, uric acid, urocanic acid, hydrogen peroxide, naptholene, sulfates, phenols, p-amino benzoic acid, and pyridoxine; further wherein the the dressing passes greater than 20% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm through the vapor occlusive barrier and hydrogel layer.
  • In general, any of the apparatuses described herein may be configured to enhance the stability of the dressings described herein, and in particular their UV transmissivity. Typically, the hydrogels described herein include between 0.025% and 10% of coal tar. If the coal tar were (even at the 0.025%) dissolved into the hydrogel, the coal tar would occlude virtually all of the UV light within the 300-320 nm range. As previously described by the inventors in U.S. Pat. No. 9,370,449, a hydrogel in which the coal tar is present in globules (e.g., microglobules) rather than dissolved may instead be made sufficiently (e.g., 20% or more, 30% or more, 40% or more, 50% or more, etc.) UV transmissive. Unfortunately, over time (within 2-3 days or more) these globules or clusters may continue to dissolve into the hydrogel, a process which may accelerate on exposure to air and in contact with a patient's skin. Surprisingly, as described herein, the inventors have found that very high concentrations of a salt, and particularly MgCl2, may be used, particularly in the absence of sorbitol and detergents, to stabilize the hydrogel containing coal tar, likely be preventing the coal tar from dissolving into the hydrogel. As a result, hydrogels treated with coal tar may have a much longer shelf-life and patient use life (e.g., extending from days to months or more).
  • Typically, the amount of MgCl2 may be high, for example, 5% or more, 6% or more 7% or more 8% or more, 9% or more, 10% or more, 12% or more, 15% or more, 17% or more, 20% or more, 25% or more, 30% or more, 35% or more, 40% or more, 50% or more, etc. Any of these variations may also include calcium (e.g., CaCl2). The amount of calcium may be less (e.g., 10 mM) up to equimolar amounts of CaCl2 compared to MgCl2.
  • For example, described herein are phototherapy dressings that are highly UV transparent, the dressing comprising: a support body having a window; a medicament extending across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel, wherein the suspension comprises a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract, further wherein the medicament is substantially free of sorbitol and comprises 5% or more MgCl2 by weight; wherein the medicament occludes less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • As mentioned the amount of MgCl2 may be greater than 5% (e.g., 10% or more, 15% or more, etc.). The MgCl2 may be present in the hydrogel, or the hydrogel may be stored and/or soaked in a solution of high MgCl2. Any of these dressings may occlude less than 70% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm (e.g., less than 60% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm, etc.). The coal tar (e.g., micro-globules of coal tar and/or coal tar exact) may have a uniform diameter that varies less than about 50%. In some variations the microglobules have a diameter of between 10-100 μm.
  • Any of the dressings described herein may have an adhesive on the phototherapy dressing, and/or a hydrocolloid perimeter adjacent to the hydrogel, and/or a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window in contact with the medicament, as described above. The support body may be made of polyurethane. The support body may comprise a thin layer of polymeric material having a thickness of less than 0.005 inches.
  • In any of the variations described herein, the hydrogel may be between 0.01 inches to 0.08 inches thick. The the phototherapy dressing may have a thickness of less than 0.2 inches. As mentioned above, the dressing may also include a scrim material connecting the medicament to the support body. The scrim material may extend from the hydrogel and connect the medicament to the support body, wherein the scrim is configured to prevent contraction of the hydrogel in a plane of the hydrogel.
  • In addition, any of the dressing described herein may include an identifier that may be used (e.g., by the UV light source) to uniquely identify the dressing and the identifier may be associated with a particular region of the patient's skin, so that repeating UV light therapy may be applied in the same location. Thus, a phototherapy dressing may have a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing and/or the region of a patient's body. For example a phototherapy dressing may include a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing, wherein the unique identifier is one or more of: an RFID tag, an optical code, a magnetic signature, or an alphanumeric code, a capacitance signature and a resistive signature.
  • The hydrogel may be primarily water, minus the percentage (e.g., by weigh) of coal tar and/or MgCl2. For example the hydrogel portion may comprise less than 85% water.
  • For example, a phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent may comprise: a support body having a window; a medicament extending across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel, wherein the suspension comprises a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract, further wherein the medicament is substantially free of sorbitol and comprises 5% or more MgCl2 by weight; wherein the medicament occludes less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • A phototherapy dressing that is highly UV transparent may include: a support body having a window; a medicament extending across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including a suspension of between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar extract mixed in the hydrogel, wherein the suspension comprises a plurality of micro-globules of coal tar or coal tar extract, further wherein the medicament is substantially free of sorbitol and comprises 10% or more MgCl2 by weight; wherein the medicament occludes less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • Another way that the dressings described herein may made to increase their UV transmittance, even in the presence of 0.025% to 10% coal tar within the hydrogel (which would normally, when dissolved, occlude virtually all of the UV light through the hydrogel, is to arranged the coal tar or coal tar extract to provide regions in which the hydrogel is relatively free of coal tar (including coal tar clusters or microclusters. Thus, as mentioned above, the coal tar may be arranged in small clusters grouped into columns (e.g., perpendicular to the plane of the hydrogel), lines (e.g., grid or comparable patterns) within the hydrogel, so that adjacent clusters/lines/etc. of coal tar may occlude UV light (e.g., >95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, etc.); regions outside of these clusters, columns, lines, etc. may be relative free of coal tar (including dissolved coal tar) and may therefore pass the majority of UV light (e.g., may pass >95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 60%, 50%, etc.) Thus, on average, the hydrogel may transmit greater than 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, etc.
  • For example, described herein are phototherapy dressings that are highly UV transparent, the dressing comprising: a support body having a window; a medicament extending in a plane across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar in the hydrogel, wherein the coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged in within the hydrogel to form alternating first regions that occlude more than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm and second regions that occlude less than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm across the plane of the medicament; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • In general, the spacing between the UV occluding regions of coal tar and the non-UV occluding regions may be any appropriate distance, including, for example, greater than 0 1 mm, greater than 0.2 mm, greater than 0.3 mm, greater than 0.4 mm, greater than 0 5 mm, greater than lmm, greater than 1.2 mm, greater than 1.5 mm, greater than 1.7 mm, greater than 2 mm, etc. and/or may be less than 5 cm, less than 4 cm, less than 3.5 cm, less than 3 cm, less than 2.5 cm less than 2 cm, less than 1.5 cm, less than 1 cm, etc. For example, the first regions and the second regions may be separated in the plane of the medicament by between about 1 mm and about 2000 mm (in the plane of the medicament). The first regions and the second regions may be separated in the plane of the medicament by a function of the surface area of the adjacent UV occluding regions (e.g., the first and second regions); for example the separation between the two regions may be approximately the square root of the combined surface area of adjacent regions, or a multiple (e.g., 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,1.5, etc.) of this.
  • The first regions may comprise columns of coal tar or coal tar extract that extend perpendicular to the plane of the medicament. In some variations, the first regions comprise lines of coal tar or coal tar extending in the plane of the medicament. In some variations, the first regions comprise clusters of coal tar or coal tar extract. As mentioned above, overall, the medicament may occlude less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body (e.g., less than 75%, less than 70%, less than 65%, less than 60%, less than 55%, less than 50%, etc.).
  • As described above, the medicament may be substantially free of surfactants/detergents, such as glycerol and/or sorbitol and may comprise 5% or more MgCl2 (e.g., 7.5% or more, 10% or more, 15% or more, etc.).
  • In any of the variations described herein, the phototherapy dressing may have a hydrocolloid perimeter adjacent to the medicament, and/or a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier extending across the window in contact with the medicament.
  • For example, described herein are phototherapy dressing that are highly UV transparent and include: a support body having a window; a medicament extending in a plane across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar extract in the hydrogel, wherein the coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged in a plurality of columns or lines within the hydrogel, (e.g., wherein the columns or lines are separated by between about 0.1 mm and about 3 cm); and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament. The phototherapy dressing of claim 21, wherein the arrangement of coal tar or coat tar extract forms alternating regions that occlude more than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm and regions that occlude less than 80% of the UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm across the plane of the medicament. The columns or lines may be separated by 1 mm or more (e.g., between 0.1 mm and 3 cm, between 0.5 mm and about 2 cm, between about 1 mm and 1.5 cm, etc.). The coal tar or coal tar extract may be arranged in columns perpendicular to the plane of the medicament, and/or arranged in lines extending in the plane of the medicament.
  • Also described herein are phototherapy dressings that are highly UV transparent, the dressings having: a support body having a window; a medicament extending in a plane across the window, the medicament comprising a hydrogel including between 0.025% and 5% coal tar or coal tar in the hydrogel, wherein the coal tar or coal tar extract is arranged in a plurality of columns or lines within the hydrogel; wherein, on average, the medicament occludes less than 80% of UV light at wavelengths between 300 and 320 nm from passing through the window of the support body; and an attachment for a phototherapy UV light source on the support body, the attachment configured to secure the phototherapy UV light source over the medicament.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in the claims that follow. A better understanding of the features and advantages of the present invention will be obtained by reference to the following detailed description that sets forth illustrative embodiments, in which the principles of the invention are utilized, and the accompanying drawings of which:
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of an image of coal tar (e.g., globules of coal tar) suspended in a hydrogel patch.
  • FIGS. 2A-2B illustrates one example of a reservoir matrix for delivery of a medicament through a thin film delivery layer.
  • FIGS. 2C and 2D illustrate examples of hydrogels including clusters or lines of coal tar having areas of UV transmissivity (e.g., >40%, >50%, >60%, >70%, >80%, >90%, etc.) UV transmissive for 300-320 nm, alternating with areas of non-transmissivity (e.g., <20%, <10%, <5%, <1%, etc.).
  • FIG. 3 shows an occlusive dressing for use with a light system that contains light guides.
  • FIGS. 4A and 4B show examples of island dressings with a removable and replaceable center.
  • FIG. 5 schematically illustrates a method for delivering a medicament, occlusive dressing and therapeutic light.
  • FIG. 6 schematically illustrates one example of an algorithm for calculating dose of therapeutic energy.
  • FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate examples of devices for directly measuring skin characteristics.
  • FIG. 8A is an array of LEDs with multiple center wavelengths.
  • FIG. 8B is a graph showing a relationship for dosing with an LED or array of LEDs.
  • FIGS. 9A-9C illustrates the use of reflectors with any of the LEDs/LED arrays described herein.
  • FIGS. 10 and 11 illustrate examples of a non-odor emitting occlusive dressing with non-occlusive thin film border (e.g., reduced odor/odor-free dressing).
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B illustrate examples devices for delivery of a therapeutic agent to the scalp, fingers, knuckles or hands of a patient (shown here as hand/glove embodiments, though the principle of operation described herein may be generalized to other body regions).
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B show systems for locating treatment location on a body with an array of LEDs, temporary wear patch and transducers.
  • FIG. 14 schematically illustrates one method by which a medicament may be mixed within a base.
  • FIG. 15 shows an example of an occlusive dressing with layers including a layer of a hydrogel containing a medicament for treatment of a skin condition. The medicament is arranged in vertical columns with in the hydrogel.
  • FIG. 16 is an example of a dressing in which a coal tar hydrocolloid is placed in an equally distributed patter on the patch.
  • FIGS. 17A-17K illustrates user interfaces for one example of an application software for operating a light therapy apparatus (device, system, etc.) as described herein, configured to be run on a user's smartphone and wirelessly control a light source/applicator.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates one method by which UV index and a location is fed into a controller for the application of light therapy (e.g., which may be hardware, software or firmware, e.g., running on a personal computing device such as a tablet, smartphone, etc.) to determine the time of light exposure and/or automatically control the delivery of light therapy.
  • FIG. 19A shows another example of a dressing as described herein, including coal tar globules suspended in the hydrogel patch.
  • FIG. 19B illustrates another example of a dressing including a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier (shown as Tefzel) over the medicament (e.g., hydrogel), shown in an exploded view in FIG. 19B.
  • FIG. 19C illustrates a perspective view of the dressing of FIG. 19B.
  • FIG. 20 is another example of a dressing as described herein, in which the medicament is kept separated from the hydrogel portion by a removable barrier to be removed by the user before or shortly after applying. Removing the barrier essentially combines the medicament with the hydrogel in a predictable manner
  • FIG. 21 shows one example of a method of manufacturing a dressing. In FIG. 21, the diagram illustrates a process where ferromagnetic coal tar pillars (columns) are created using electromagnets in combination with mold wells filled with the ferromagnetic coal tar.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a process by which coal tar and a hydrocolloid may be mixed with a gelling hydrocolloid and laid down on the dressing with a spray.
  • FIG. 23 show an example of a method of using a viscous hydrogel with ferromagnetic coal tar suspension to magnetically displace the coal tar during light therapy.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an example of an apparatus (e.g., dressing) in which a viscous hydrogel with coal tar suspension is mechanically displaced from a treatment region within the dressing prior to the application of light therapy.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates another example of an apparatus in which the medicament (e.g., coal tar) solution is mechanically displaced, in this example by the light applicator, to apply the light energy.
  • FIG. 26 shows a first example of a configuration for detecting (e.g., magnetically) contact between a light therapy applicator (e.g., light) and a dressing (e.g., patch).
  • FIG. 27 is another example of a configuration of a dressing and light therapy applicator that can detect contact between the two when the light therapy applicator is coupled to the dressing.
  • FIG. 28 is another example of a configuration for detecting contact between a light therapy applicator and a dressing (via an optical sensor).
  • FIG. 29 illustrates another example of a configuration for detecting contact between a light therapy applicator and a dressing (via an infra-red proximity sensor).
  • FIG. 30 show an example of a method of determining an applying a light therapy (phototherapy) dose as described herein; this method may be preferably implemented using an apparatus such as one or more of the systems described herein.
  • FIG. 31 is a detailed description of a method of determining and applying a dose of energy.
  • FIG. 32 is a graph illustrating a continuous non-linear function calculating percentage of last dose based on hours from last dose.
  • FIG. 33 is a graph showing a continuous non-linear function by which remnant dose may be calculated.
  • FIG. 34 is a flow diagram illustrating one method of determining a minimal erythemal dose (MED), rate photoadaptation and photoadaptation limit.
  • FIG. 35 is a graph showing relative contribution erythema from monochromatic light source (adapted from Anders, Photochemistry and Biology, Vol 61, No. 2, pp 200-205, 1995).
  • FIG. 36 shows a sample distribution of LEDs at 2 different wavelengths in a single light source.
  • FIG. 37 is a table illustrating one method of determining a relative contribution from LEDs to MED at different wavelengths.
  • FIGS. 38A-38G illustrate user for one example of an application software for operating a light therapy apparatus (device, system, etc.) as described herein, tracking doses applied across different lesions, at different treatment times/dates.
  • FIG. 39 is a graph illustrating the effect of contraction of the hydrogel on UV transmittance.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • In general, described herein are methods, compositions, and apparatuses (e.g., systems and devices) for phototherapy. For example, described herein are phototherapy dressings, phototherapy UV light applicators (sources), and methods of using them to treat skin disorders such as psoriasis.
  • Also described herein are medicaments including gels (and particularly hydrogels) having a suspension coal tar or car tar extract, wherein the coal tar extract is between 0.025% and 10% and the sizes of the particles (globules) distributed through the gel are appropriately sized and/or distributed to permit a substantial amount of UV light through the medicament and/or a dressing including the medicament. For example described herein are dressings with crude coal tar or coal tar distillate of 0.025%-10% in which less than 0.025% is dissolved into the base. A medicament may include a suspension of a hydrophobic substance in a hydrophilic base with viscosity greater than water that can transmit light with an absorbance is less than 0.31. The light being absorbed may be in the wavelength range of 300-320 nm. The hydrophobic substance may be a crude coal tar or crude coal tar distillate.
  • Also described herein are medicaments that are light blocking and mixed in a base that does not block light such that: the medicament is hydrophobic or hydrophilic and the base is the opposite, the medicament is 10% or less of the total volume, the amount of medicament dissolved in the base is less than the amount of medicament that is suspended or emulsified in the base, the mixture has a viscosity greater than water at skin temperature, the mixture of the medicament and the base blocks less that if the medicament was fully dissolved in the base and the mixture is a homogenous such that a loss of base from the mixture results in a proportional loss in the medicament.
  • For example, a medicament that is light blocking may be mixed in a base that does not block light such that: the medicament is hydrophobic or hydrophilic and the base is the opposite, the medicament may be 10% or less of the total volume, the amount of medicament dissolved in the base is less than the amount of medicament that is suspended or emulsified in the base, the mixture is a solid or semisolid, transfer of the medicament out of the base occurs at least partially through the dissolved medicament in the base, when the medicament is transferred out of the base, more medicament is dissolved into the base, keeping the % of a dissolved medicament constant and the mixture of the medicament and the base blocks less that if the medicament was fully dissolved.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates one embodiment of a dressing for use with a phototherapy system or on its own for delivery a medicament. The dressing is preferably used in concert with a therapeutic energy-delivering device, but it may alternatively be used independently for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise. The base may contain a crude coal tar or a distillate of coal tar made to 0.025%-10% w/w (of which less than 0.025-0.1% is dissolved into the base). In other embodiments it is coal tar, coal tar extract or a mixture of coal tar and coal tar extract, and/or one or more of: corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy. The medicament may be a combination of medicaments. The partition coefficient of the hydrogel and medicament phase may be adjusted by adding surfactants such as Oleth-3, Laureth-4, Di-Isopropyl Adipate, FINSOLV-TN, Isopropyl Myristate, or any other substance, synthetic or natural, that would change the solubility of medicament in the two phases, such as PVA. In one embodiment, the base contains a uniform density of coal tar globules throughout, while in other embodiments the globules may be distributed in vertical columns, or may be concentrated at different heights within the gels, or oriented in patterns to maximize the penetration of UVB light and the efficiency of coal tar delivery to skin. In one embodiment, the base is composed of 40-99.9% water. The base may contain 0.1%-60% salts, including magnesium, calcium, sodium, or chloride salts, or hydrophilic substances such as wax monoesters, triglycerides, fatty acids, or squalenes. These can be added to the gel components prior to gelation, or after gelation by a diffusion process, where the additives are applied directly onto the gel, or diffused into the gel with another carrier. The base may contain 0.1%-10% water absorbing substances such as Polyacrylic Acid, Carbomer, Gelatin, Cellulose or Dextran. These can be added to the gel components prior to gelation, or after gelation by a diffusion process. The base may be hydrophilic, with a viscosity greater than that of water at skin temperature. Medicament may be seeded into the base by either mechanical agitation, stirring, ultrasonic waves, vibrations, spraying the medicament into the solution, injecting the medicament into the solution. The globules of medicament may be of varying diameters, or they may be of uniform diameters. In one embodiment of the dressing, the base may be between 0.001 and 0.100″ thick.
  • Also described herein are skin dressings that contain a medicament layer in contact with a diffusion layer such that: the medicament in the medicament layer may be light blocking of varying thickness and configured to have areas of zero thickness that allow light to pass, the diffusion layer may be skin contacting when worn and entirely between the skin and the medicament layer, the medicament may be transferred from the medicament layer and into the diffusion layer by dissolving in amount less than 0.5% of the diffusion layer and the amount of medicament in the medicament layer may be greater than the amount of medicament that is transferred to the skin during 7 days of wear.
  • In general, a dressing may contain an absorbent material such as a fabric, thread, pad or pellets, soaked in a medicament where the medicament contained in the absorbent material is isolated from part of the dressing material. The dressing may be partially transmissive to light where non-transmissive parts are oriented and or distributed to minimize blocking surface area in the direction of light penetration over the treatment area such as vertical columns, a thread grid, a fabric border or distributed pellets.
  • In any of the examples described here, the coal tar/coal tar extract may be arranged in lines, columns or clusters so that an alternating pattern of UV occluded/UV un-occluded regions is formed. These clusters/lines/columns may be typically separated by a maximum distance (e.g., 0.1 cm, 0.2 cm, 0.3 cm, 0.4 cm, 0.5 cm, 1 cm, 1.5 cm, 2 cm, 2.5 cm, 3 cm, 3.5 cm, 4 cm, 4.5 cm, 5 cm, etc.) which may allow release of the coal tar from the gel onto the skin for adequate coverage, but may be sufficiently separated so that the coal tar does not dissolve into the UV un-occluded regions over time and prevent UV light from passing. As will be discussed below, the apparatus (including the hydrogel) may be treated to minimize the coal tar from dissolving into the hydrogel and occluding light.
  • For example, FIGS. 2A-2B illustrates an embodiment of the dressing which incorporates the medicament on a reservoir matrix and includes a skin contacting delivery layer that aids the transfer of medicament from the reservoir matrix to the skin surface. In one embodiment, the coal tar matrix is a grid pattern (FIG. 2B), with different thicknesses at varying points on the dressing cross-section, resulting in areas of the cross section which are not covered by the grid. The grid may be configured in different shapes: square, circular, triangular, a combination thereof. The grid may be configured to shift position over the course of wear. The grid may be configured to degrade over the course of wear due to pH, interaction with skin fluids, temperature, time, or exposure to UV light. The matrix may be configured to change color or form over the course of wear in order to indicate the appropriate time for a dressing change or to confirm exposure to UV light. In one embodiment, the matrix is configured to minimize its footprint on the skin surface area by being arranged in vertical columns that span the full thickness of the gel. The matrix can be composed of one interconnected network, or may consist of individual globules. In one embodiment, the matrix may be impregnated with coal tar, a coal tar distillate, or a combination of a coal tar and a carrier that facilitates the transfer of the coal tar through the delivery layer and/or skin. In other embodiments the matrix is impregnated with coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy. The matrix may be in direct contact with the deliver layer, or may be separated by a thin layer of liquid that facilitates the transfer of coal tar from the matrix into the delivery layer. Materials for the diffusion layer may be composed of a hydrogel, low or high durometer silicone, urethane, other flexible polymers, a hydrocolloid, or a combination of one or more of these materials, and may contain a surfactant or oil or alcohol or silicone that alter the solubility of coal tar in the diffusion layer. In one embodiment, the the matrix consists of material with no coal tar solubility, or very minimal coal tar solubility. The solubility of the coal tar in the delivery layer and the thickness of that layer may be configured in such a way that the UVB transmission through the delivery layer is >30%.
  • In some examples, the grid of coal tar is formed by soaking a matrix of cellulose to act as a reservoir for coal tar (crude coal tar, CCT); in direct contact with the hydrogel, the matric may replace the dissolved coal tar as it is delivered form the hydrogel to the skin. This may allow a constant rate of delivery of coal tar to the skin and also allow a high UV transmissivity. The matrix may be an inner filler that does not absorb surfactants or CCT. The cellule may directly contact the delivery layer. Any pattern (not limited to a grid) may be used. The release onto the skin may be a function of the (adjustable) thickness and CCT concentration.
  • Alternatively, the coal tar may be injected or inserted or co-formed into the hydrogel (e.g., using a needle or other injection means), without the need for a separate matrix. For example hydrogel may be applied prior to or during setting over a frozen pattern of coal tar.
  • In any of these examples, an occlusive dressing with a medicament may contain portions with variable transmissivity of light (for example a portion may be only an occlusive thin film) where the portions line up with light guides on a light source. The light guides may initially transmit less light than the hydrogel, then, as the hydrogel absorbs skin exudates, the light guides transmit more than the hydrogel.
  • FIGS. 2C and 2D illustrate other patterns of coal-tar within a hydrogel. FIG. 2C shows clusters of coal tar (dark spots), while FIG. 2D shows lines within the hydrogel. The clear regions around the darker spots/lines may be UV transmissive (e.g., >80% UV transmission through the hydrogel), while the darker lines/spots may be non-transmissive (e.g., <80% UV transmission).
  • Alternatively, FIG. 3 illustrates an embodiment of the dressing 307 that may contain self-contained portions (labeled Non Medicament Portions 303) that may be composed of a different material than the hydrogel dressing itself, and are dispersed between the medicament portions 301. These self-contained portions are arranged to offer pathways for UV light (from LEDs 309) to travel the thickness of the gel and are generally perpendicular to the surface of the dressing. These portions maybe composed of thin films, plastics, hydrogels, hollow tubes, silicones, urethanes, or any other material that does not change in UVB transmission when exposed to skin 305 solutions, including perspiration or sebum, or when exposed to the medicament within the base, or the base material. In some embodiments these portions may be completely empty as well. In one embodiment the non-medicament portions may be configured to cover up to 50% of the cross-sectional area of the base. In alternative embodiments, the non-medicament portions may be configured to cover 10-90% of the base. In another embodiment, the self-contained portions only go partially through the thickness of the dressing so that there is a continuous surface of hydrogel at the bottom of the dressing. The dressing is occlusive to gases and vapors and works with an array of LED lights that deliver, in the preferred embodiment, ultraviolet light. In alternative embodiments, blue light, visible light or infrared light is output by the LEDs.
  • Also described herein are island dressings. For example an island dressing may include a middle section of a gel or colloid that can be easily removed from the outer edge thin film during treatment and then put back down via one or more of: magnets for attachment; hook-and-latch (e.g., Velcro) for attachment; reusable adhesive for attachment.
  • For example, FIGS. 4A and 4B illustrate one embodiment of a dressing for use with a phototherapy system or on its own for delivery a medicament. The dressing is preferably used in concert with a therapeutic energy-delivering device, but it may alternatively be used independently for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise. In some embodiments, the therapeutic energy may UV light, ultrasound, infrared light, blue light, or some other energy source. The dressing may function to treat a condition such as a skin disorder or disease. In some embodiments the center is removable from the semi-removable base which is attached to the skin. The removable center is meant to be removed any time there is delivery of therapeutic energy or any other time needed. The semi-removable base is meant to contain and adhesive layer for attaching to the skin for extended wear of 1 hour to 28 days. In one embodiment the removable center attaches to the semi-removable base through magnets. In another embodiment, the removable center attaches to the semi-removable base through Velcro. Other ways to attach the removable center to the semi-removable base include adhesives, hot wax, static charge, mechanical snap, latch, slide, press fit, detent or any other type of attachment method. In some embodiments, the removable center contains a hydrogel that contacts the skin directly when attached to the semi-removable base. In other embodiments, the center contains a low or high durometer silicone, urethane, other flexible polymers, a hydrocolloid, or a combination of one or more of these materials. To hold the hydrogel in place, there may be a thin film attached to the hydrogel. The thin film is what connects the hydrogel to the attachment method and extends beyond the center section. The outer rim may be energy or UV blocking, or may allow for UV transmission around the treatment area to condition the skin for future dressing placements that may not exactly match the location of the previous dressing. The island dressing may be configured so that the hydrogel sinks into the base, in order to compensate for volume loss of the hydrogel during use. In some embodiments the hydrogel contains a medicament that may be transferred to the skin through the removable center. In some embodiments the medicament is coal tar or coal tar distillate while in other embodiments it is coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy. The dressing shown in FIGS. 4A-4B may incorporate any of the features of the dressings described herein.
  • In general, light may be delivered through any of the medicaments described herein and/or dressing with any of these medicaments included in any appropriate manner For example, FIG. 5 illustrates two methods (13, 14) for delivery of light, occlusion and a medicament to the skin. In some embodiments the medicament is coal tar or coal tar distillate while in other embodiments it is coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy. The first method involves applying the medicament to the skin and then occluding the medicament with a dressing. The dressing could be a low or high durometer silicone, urethane, other flexible polymers, a hydrocolloid, or a combination of one or more of these materials. The occlusive dressing may contain an adhesive for attachment to the skin or may wrap around the patient and attach to itself. The attachment method may be an adhesives, hot wax, static charge, mechanical snap, latch, slide, press fit, or any other type of attachment method. In one embodiment the occlusion and medicament is left on the skin for 3 days but in other embodiments it is just left on overnight or for 1-14 days. Then the medicament and the occlusive dressing is removed and the patient receives therapeutic energy. In one embodiment the therapeutic energy is UV light but in other embodiments it may be ultrasound, infrared light, blue light, or some other energy source. In one embodiment, therapeutic energy is delivered every day or multiple times per day for 4 days while in other embodiments, it is delivered after removal of the medicament and dressing and then the medicament is placed back on the skin. In other embodiments, the therapeutic energy is delivered over more than one day and then the medicament and dressing are placed back on the skin. In one embodiment the dressing and medicament are only worn and night while in another embodiment, the dressing is worn both day and night.
  • Also described herein are methods and apparatuses for implementing them that are adapted to apply light for phototherapy. For example, a method may include of the steps of: applying UV light in increments and increasing the percent increment over time until a burn occurs, then it calculates the incremental increase based on the last acceptable percent increase and the number of estimated doses left. Upon next burn the dose it can be adjusted again. MED may be obtained through dose increase until a burn occurs, and set based on the last dose that did not create a burn. Once that is found, then the ability of the skin to adjust to dose increases is found. Dose may be decreased or increased based on skin—thickness, transepiderman water loss (TEWL), redness, scale, pigmentation, etc. The last dose may be meant to cause erythema. If location is the same as previous, then use previous information to guide therapy. Another method may be to ask the patient if they think plaque is healing, or ask if they think plaque is gone. Any of these methods and apparatuses for performing them may not allow/prevent treatment within a certain time from last dose, e.g., 10 hrs, 12 hrs, 16 hrs, 18 hours, 20 hrs, etc., and also calculates dose based on the time since last treatment. For example, a dose that occurred 20 hours ago may be less than one at 26 hours. Any of these methods and apparatuses for performing them may ask if the dressing has been changed in order to adjust the predicted transmission of the dressing over time. Later on in the therapy, when there is less scale, the adjustment may decrease.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a method for calculating the dose of therapeutic energy that starts by finding the minimal erythema dose (MED). If the MED is not known it may be estimated based on the persons age, weight, gender, ethnicity, history of phototherapy, skin type, skin pigmentation, skin thickness, skin hydration, TEWL, sensitivity to light, medications, treatment location, medical records or any other personal information. This method is preferably used with a phototherapy device to treat a condition such as a skin disorder or disease but it may alternatively be used for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise. Once the MED is found it is input into an app or program on a mobile device, computer, cloud based system or any other system that is in some way connected to a therapeutic device. Then the first dose is calculated by multiplying the MED times 0.95. In other embodiments the first dose is calculated by multiplying the MED by 0.1 to 1. Then then the first dose is delivered to the body by the therapeutic delivery device and this is recorded by the app or program. Upon the next dose, the user is asked if they received a burn or if their skin is sensitive or red from the last dose. If yes, they received a sham dose of light where no light is actually delivered to their skin. Then the app or program recalculates the same increment of the dose based on the last dose that did not create a burn or if that does not exist, the first dose. In addition, the safe increase of the increment is also calculated and all of this is recorded by the app or program. If the user answers no, then the dose is incremented by the safe increment and the time is checked since the last dose. In one embodiment, the new dose is left as is if it has been less than 48 hours since the last dose. In this embodiment, if it has been 48-336 hours since the last dose, there is a sliding scale reduction based linearly on the amount of time that it has been since the last dose that is centered on a 25% reduction in the dose. In this embodiment it has been greater than 336 hours since the last dose, the dose is sent to zero and the patient must start the therapy over from the beginning. In other embodiments, the time restrictions: 48 hours and 336 hours vary from 0-500 hours and the reduction center varies between 0 and 99%. Then the dose is delivered and this is recorded by the app or program. In this method, the % increment is increased over time until a burn occurs, then it calculates the incremental increase based on the last acceptable percent increase and the number of estimated doses left. If MED occurs, dose increase is reduced based on the “predicted” acceptable dosing increase from previous sub-MED treatment and upon next burn it is adjusted again. In some embodiments, the initial dose, dose increment and increase of the increment may be based on MED, skin thickness, transepidermal water loss, health and unhealthy skin pigmentation, hydration or redness, amount of scale or any other measure of the skin. In other embodiments, the persons age, weight, gender, ethnicity, history of phototherapy, skin type, sensitivity to light, medications, medical records or any other personal information may be used to adjust the initial dose, dose increment and increase of the increment. In some embodiments that patient may be asked if the skin is healing and this information may be used to guide the dosing recommendations. In other embodiments the patient may be asked if they have changed a dressing or how many days has it been since they changed a dressing located on the skin where the dose is going to occur. Preferably dosing occurs every day but may occur multiple times per day, every other day, 1 time per week, 2 times per week, 3 times per week, 4 times per week, 5 times per week or 6 times per week.
  • Any of the method described herein may include methods and apparatuses for implementing them that determine an initial dose. For example, methods and apparatuses for implementing them may determine an initial dose starts based on patients: skin thickness, TEWL (hole in the dressing, potentially where the magnet would connect), skin hydration, skin pigmentation, age, skin type, heritage, location of lesion, etc.
  • FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate one embodiment of a sensor 709 for use with the dressing 701 or on its own to measure skin 705 thickness, TEWL, skin hydration, skin pigmentation, skin type, or location of lesion. One embodiment of the sensor utilizes a single sensor site that incorporate multiple sensors on the same site. One embodiment of the sensor utilizes multiple sensor sites. The sensor(s) site may be located directly below the sensor, within the treatment area for gathering data to characterize the plaque itself, or outside the treatment area to characterize the satellite skin. One embodiment utilizes a dressing which is configured to offer unobstructed pathways for the sensor to reach the surface of the plaque 703, or surface of the satellite skin. The sensor may be directly incorporated into light 707 or may be part of a separate device or attachment that is intended to work in combination with the light or dressing, as shown in FIG. 7B, in which the sensor reaches through the plaque 711, as shown.
  • Also described herein are LED-based light therapy with a filter for light below 300 nm, centered at 300 nm, centered at 300 nm and 310 nm, centered at 300 nm, 305 nm and 310 nm, etc. An LED array with centers in a ratio that follow the therapeutic dose may include multiple LEDs at different wavelengths including: 1×at 300 nm with 3×-9× at 310; 1× at 300 nm, 2× at 304, 3× at 308, etc. (where x is a positive integer).
  • For example an array of LEDs with wavelength centers at more than one wavelength between 300 and 320 may be used, where with higher LED wavelengths there is higher total output power governed by the MED by, for example, having more LEDs at higher wavelengths, having higher power output LEDs at higher wavelengths, differing the amount of time that the LEDs are on, etc. In some variations, it may be particular helpful to include an array of LEDs with more than one center wavelength may include a line created by the wavelength vs. 10th root of the dose has a slope of 0.015-0.05 between 300 and 320 where the dose is below the MED dose at each wavelength.
  • FIG. 8A illustrates an LED array controlled by an algorithm for determining the dose of light to be delivered by a specific light wavelength between 300 nm and 320 nm. Published data suggests that patients with psoriasis may respond better to different wavelengths of light between 300 and 320 nm (see, e.g., PMID: 23023652). Use of a LED light source may be used to deliver UV light in this range but not throughout the entire range. In order to increase psoriasis response throughout a population with one LED light source, it may be necessary to use LEDs of multiple wavelength centered within the range. In addition, minimum erythema dose (MED) is highly dependent on the wavelength and it is desirable during psoriasis treatment to remain below the MED. In creation of a multi-wavelength LED array for treatment of psoriasis it may then be necessary to create a dosing algorithm that takes into account the variation in the MED between wavelengths. ISO17166 (Erythema reference action spectrum and standard erythema dose) has an estimation of the MED for each wavelength that is governed by the following equation:

  • STANDARD ERYTHEMA DOSE (SED=10̂(0.094*(λ−298))   (equation 1)
  • Where=wavelength between 298 nm and 328 nm
  • Where SED is equivalent to erythemal effective radiant exposure of 100 J/m2.
  • This algorithm is simple but difficult to translate into dosing algorithm for a multi-wavelength LED array and may be outdated because of recently published empirical data.
  • Published data shows that when converted to the nth root of 10, the MED between 300 nm and 320 closely follows a linear distribution with a slope of 0.015-0.05. By estimating the MED dose at any wavelength between 300 nm and 320, this slope can be used in create a simple algorithm for estimating the wavelength dependent dose of a multi-wavelength LED array. An array of LEDs with more than one center wavelength where the line created by the wavelength vs 10th root of the dose has a slope of 0.015-0.05 between 300 and 320 where the dose is below the MED dose at each wavelength. See, e.g., FIG. 8B.
  • An LED array reflecting this algorithm may use LEDs with a similar power output in a ratio such as the following: 1 at 300 nm with 3-9 at 310 or 1 at 300 nm, 2 at 304, 3 at 308. In another embodiment, the light array may turn on LEDs for set time to deliver a dose of light that follows the algorithm listed above or use different LEDs with power levels that reflect the algorithm listed above.
  • In another embodiment, there is an array of LEDs with wavelength centers at more than one wavelength between 300 and 320 nm where there is a higher dose delivered to the skin by having more LEDs at higher wavelengths, by blocking some of the LEDs or by having higher output LEDs at higher wavelengths or by differing the amount of time that the LEDs are on.
  • Light array embodiments may include LED based light therapy with a filter that blocks light below 300 nm with LEDs with a center at 300 nm, a center at 303 nm, a center at 300 nm and 310 nm, a center at 303 nm and 310 nm or a center at 300 nm, 305 nm and 310 nm. Alternative embodiments of a light array with a filter that blocks light below 300 nm may have any number of wavelength centers anywhere between 300 nm and 320 nm. In other embodiments the filter may block all light below 296 nm, 297 nm, 298 nm or 299 nm. For manufacturing purposes, a range of wavelength centers may be used such as 298-305 and 305-315.
  • Also described herein are LEDs and light sources including LEDs in which a reflector is used. For example a reflector may include one reflector for the 300 nm LED and 4 smaller reflectors for the 310 nm LED. In some variations the reflector is configured to enable a square profile (e.g., using either or both a linear array and/or single LED).
  • The cross section and top view shown in FIG. 9A illustrates one embodiment of a reflector that is tailored to a relatively large square profile over a relatively short throw distance.
  • The power output from a point source LED is non-uniform and typically reduces as you move away from the center line. When the LED point source is close to the projection surface the areas further away from the LED can receive much less energy. Additionally the incidence angle of the light at the areas farther from the LED become more and more acute. As the incidence angle of the light moves farther and farther away from perpendicular to the projection surface it can be detrimental to penetration depth for the treatment.
  • Therefore, it is desirable to both distribute the higher power light more central to the LED across the entire projection surface and make it such that the incidence angle of the light is close to perpendicular to the projection surface.
  • The embodiment illustrated in the cross section profile shown in FIG. 9B uses an elliptical back reflector, a parabolic inner reflector surface and an outer compound parabolic reflector surface. The inner parabolic reflector places the LED point source at its focal point and redirects the lower power wider angled light directly at the projection surface making its incidence angle close to perpendicular. The elliptical back reflector places the point source of the LED at one of its two focal points and redirects the higher energy light central to the LED through the 2nd focal point of the ellipse onto the outer compound parabolic reflector surface. The outer compound parabolic reflector is positioned such that it shares its focal point with the 2nd focal point of the elliptical back reflector and redirects the light that goes through its focal point towards the projection surface.
  • In order to alter the projected circle from a point source into a large square profile the reflector shown in FIGS. 9B-9C was designed such that the corners use a separate cross sectional shape than that of the flat sides. Each cross sectional shape is designed with its specific geometric requirements taken into account. The result is a reflector that reflects well into the corners of the square profile while creating a more even distribution over the area.
  • The reflector surfaces are such that they substantially reflect UV light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 9C this is achieved through spray coating of reflective paint. Alternative embodiments could use polymer or metal deposition or chroming to coat the surfaces in a metalized coating or reflective plastic. Further embodiments could be constructed substantially from metals that reflect UV light.
  • The embodiment shown in FIG. 9B shows the back reflector being suspended over the LED using two side struts. Alternative embodiments could mount the back reflector to a light passing lens covering the part or all of the reflector body.
  • Alternative embodiments could use additional planes of optimization to further even the distribution of light across the square profile
  • Alternative embodiments could use different shape profiles and/or the combination thereof. Additionally, the same result could be achieved through the use of lenses or the combination of reflector(s) and lens(es).
  • Alternative embodiments could have a non-square projected surface shape and use similar reflector elements.
  • In any of the apparatuses, compositions and methods described herein, the apparatus may use materials that are inert and UV clear such as Teflon, FEP or ePTFE derivatives that are not affected by an acid, benzene type molecules, creosotes, etc. For example, any materials that may decrease in UV transmission due to contact with medicament in hydrogel (such as PVC, polyurethane or silicone) are not in direct contact with hydrogel may be used.
  • Returning now to FIG. 2, this figure illustrates one embodiment of the dressing assembly that includes a film that covers the outer surface of the hydrogel. The film is represented by the 0.02″ PTFE thin film in FIG. 2. The film may cover a single side of the hydrogel, or it may wrap around the side edges of the base. The film does not cover the surface of the base that is in contact with the skin. The material is inert to interaction with the base, other dressing assembly materials, the medicament, any component of skin solution, including urea, salts naturally occurring on the skin surface, sebum. The layer is between 50 and 100% UVB transmissive to wavelengths between 300-320 nm. The material has a low MVTR less than 400-500 μm/sqm/day by 3M Upright bottle method. The material may be composed of glass, Teflon, FEP ePTFE derivatives or any other material that is resistant to degradation. The layer is immobilized against the hydrogel layer to avoid smearing of any coal tar or medicament that may come in contact with the film.
  • In any of the apparatuses, compositions and methods described herein, an odor-reducing or odor-eliminating element or elements may be included. Thus any of these apparatuses or compositions may be low-odor or odorless (coal tar/extract including) compositions and/or dressings. A coal tar or coal tar extract composition/dressing that does not emit an odor once placed on the skin may include be occlusive over the area covering the hydrogel but has a high MVTR on the thin film adhesive edges to allow it to stay in place (waterproof) after exposure to water and not roll up over time. Edges of hydrogel may be sealed with a flexible material like a wax to further reduce odor.
  • FIGS. 10 and 11 illustrates embodiments of a dressing that are configured to reduce the odor or MVTR of the hydrogel. The adhesive perimeter 1105 may contain a formulation of chemicals that either neutralize the smell of the coal tar, or emit a preferable odor during the course of wear. The adhesive perimeter may contain a layer of wax, oils, or a physical filter 1117 that reduce the odor or MVTR through the dressing material. The filler may be formulated with chemicals that reduce or neutralize the smell of the coal tar, or prevent the odor from leaving the coal tar hydrogel through the perimeter of the gel. The filler may be composed of a wax, hydrocolloid, closed cell foam, plastic, cellulose or any other flexible material with low vapor permeability. The filler may be in a gel form or a solid form. The filler covers the entire outer edge surface of the hydrogel 1103. In some embodiments, the filler does not contain medicament, while in other embodiments the filler may contain corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy. In some embodiments the filler may act as a reservoir of medicament that is initially outside of the treatment area but has the ability to diffuse into the treatment area over the course of wear. The device may be placed over a plaque 1109 on the skin 1111.
  • Also described herein are apparatuses (device and/or systems) for application to the body that include one or more body-part specific applicator which may be reusable with one or more disposable (e.g., dressing) components. For example, scalp and finger solutions may include foamed coal tar w petroleum to help occlude hair, polymer mix that is delivered as a liquid then gels into place when it hits the scalp and then can be washed off, a set of solutions for hand, face, scalp that include a beany, glove and headband, hairclip, glove/sock/cap having opening for top or bottom or foot or hand that match the size and shape of our dressing thin film 1107 outer edge, glove/sock/cap comes with a re-sealable pouch so hydrogel does not dry out once attached, allowing multiday use from one dressing, glove/sock/cap can be worn just at night and allows light treatment in the morning without any modification to our dressing or light, glove/sock/cap entire inner surface is hydrogel Entire glove is the coal tar hydrogel, glove/sock/cap could be separated between treatment and occlusion. Any of the apparatuses described herein may be configured as daily wear, extended wear and/or night wear products. Any of these apparatuses or compositions (including dressings) may include pigmentation of the patch to match the skin 1111. The thin film may forma gap 1115 between the hydrogel and the edge of the dressing for sealing. The film may be a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier, as described herein.
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B illustrate devices for delivery of a therapeutic agent to the scalp, fingers, knuckles or hands of a patient that conforms to the shape of the body part. In one embodiment therapeutic agent is a foamed coal tar with base of petroleum that occludes the hair and scalp. An alternative embodiment of this includes a different medicament other than coal tar such as coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy. Another alternative embodiment includes a different base such as a hydrocolloid, hydrogel, alcohol, silicone gel, mineral oil, other oil, wax or other substance that may be used for a base. In another embodiment the therapeutic agent contains a substance such as keratin, a metal such as silver or aluminum or gold, grease, wax, or other hair restoring or thickening or shining agent that increases the reflectivity of the hair to therapeutic light. In another embodiment a polymer is mixed prior to application and then gels into place when it hits the scalp. It can then be washed off. Other embodiments include occlusive conforming devices such as a cap, beany, glove, mitt, headband sock, shoe or hairclip to occlude the body part. In one embodiment the glove/sock/cap has opening for top or bottom or foot or hand that match the size and shape of a dressing thin film outer edge such that the middle of the dressing containing a medicament directly contacts the skin. In another embodiment, the glove/sock/cap comes with a re-sealable pouch so that moisture and gases are not released, allowing multiday use from one device. These embodiments may be worn just at night and allows light treatment in the morning without any modification to a separate dressing or light that attaches to the glove/sock/cap. In one embodiment the entire inner surface of the glove/sock/cap is a base with a medicament. In another embodiment, the base with medicament of the glove/sock/cap can be separated between treatment and occlusion. This allows for daily wear, multi-day wear, or night wear of the device.
  • Also described herein are temporary, single-use, disposable apparatuses (e.g., devices, systems, including dressings) and/or durable/reusable components. For example, described herein are UV clear sticky pads can be put on the body with transducers on them to allow a “localized” light therapy in a full body treatment. For example, such embodiment may include: transducers to locate the plaque in 3D space using 1-5 transducers on the pad and a couple in the light box, reflectors to focus the LED lights to give a specific radiance at a specific distance, using the location of the pad in space along with the distance from the LEDs to determine the radiance of the LED on the patients skin, adding combined LED radiance numbers to tightly control the dosing of light the plaque, turning on or even focus the LEDs on the pads themselves, which could be automated; and/or shading/blocking parts of the sticky pad that are not affected, which could be permanent or erasable.
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate systems for locating treatment location on a body with an array of LEDs, temporary wear patch and transducers. The reusable or disposable ultraviolet light clear sticky pads 1315 can be put on the body with transducers on them to allow a “localized” light therapy in a full body treatment. The transducers 1305 may be incorporated into the dressing described herein. This may work by locating the locating the target treatment area 1301 in 3D space using 1-5 transducers on the patch and 1-5 transducers in the light box. The LEDs may use reflectors, lens or a combination of both to focus the LED lights 1309 to give a specific radiance at a specific distance 1308. The LEDs may be moved manually or automatically to focus on the patch on the skin and the calculated radiance on the patch may be used to calculate the amount of time needed to deliver a therapeutic dose of light. In the preferred embodiment the LEDs may output UV light for treatment of a skin condition or disease while in other embodiments the system may be used for wound healing, skin treatment, or any suitable applications, clinical or otherwise. In some embodiments, the therapeutic energy may UV light, ultrasound, infrared light, blue light, or some other energy source. The automated motion of the LEDs may be done through a servo controlled motor or other mechanized way. The patch may be shaded to block parts of the skin from treatment 1307. This shading could be done with a marker, printout of a desired shape or other method that blocks therapeutic light. The patches could be used through the course of a treatment or used one time and discarded. In some embodiments, the skin contact side of the patch may include emollients to hydrate the skin and improve light penetration through the skin.
  • Also described herein are methods by which a medicament may be mixed in base (e.g., gel, such as but not limited to a hydrogel). For example, if the medicament is crude coal tar or coal tar, it may be a distillate composing between 0.1% to 10% of the mixture. The base may be an aqueous liquid that forms the continuous phase of the mixture that is more hydrophilic than hydrophobic. When mixed, the medicament may break up into particles greater than 0.001 mm in size. The viscosity of the base after is mixing may be significantly greater than water such that the medicament particles tend to stay in suspension (and/or base may be cross-linked to form a semi-solid). The mixture may be layered or molded onto a dressing and placed in gas impermeable pouch.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a method by which medicament is incorporated into the hydrogel structure. The process may involve adding crude coal tar or a distillate of crude coal tar to a solution of hydrogel component(s), in order that the coal tar distillate comprises between 0.1% and 10% of the total mixture. In other embodiments the medicament is a corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy. The hydrogel base may consist of a single component, or multiple components. In the preferred embodiment, the water component is 90% by weight of the hydrogel but may vary from 50-99% of the hydrogel by weight. The hydrogel may contain other components such as alcohol, silicone, oil, wax, surfactant, aloe, salts such as magnesium, calcium, sodium or potassium or any other substance. The gel is mixed into a portion of the hydrogel components, which have a viscosity greater than water at skin temperature, but do not completely dissolve the medicament in solution. In the preferred embodiment the curing process does not involve the addition of any agents that may cause a negative reaction on the skin surface. The curing and thickening process may be through cold/hot cycling, de-hydration, click hydrogel structure formation, gamma beam, ultraviolet light or any other curing process. The gelation process begins to occur immediately after all of the gel components are mixed. During the mixing the medicament is broken into globules a generally similar size. In the preferred embodiment the globules of medicament are greater than 0.001 mm in size. In other embodiments the globules range in size from individual molecules to 1 cm in size. In one embodiment, viscosity of the base after is mixing is significantly greater than water such that the medicament particles tend to stay in suspension. In another embodiment, the base is cross-linked to form a semi-solid or solid such that the medicament particles tend to stay in suspension. After completion of the mixing, the mixture is layered or molded onto a dressing and place in a gas and liquid impermeable pouch.
  • Any of the material described herein may be combined or otherwise used to modify any of the other material in the body of this disclosure.
  • Dressings for Occlusive Treatment of Skin Conditions with Medicaments
  • Also described herein are dressings that may be particularly comfortably worn, yet provide occlusive treatment of skin conditions with any of the medicaments described herein. In addition to some of the variations described above (e.g., FIGS. 2 and 10), also described herein are dressing containing a suspension of a hydrophobic medicament at a concentration of less than about 10% that is both UV blocking and UVA photosensitizing in hydrophilic gel that passes UVB light and blocks UVA light. The UVA blocking material may be, for example, HEXYL 2-[4-(DIETHYLAMINO)-2-HYDROXYBENZO.
  • In any of the dressings described herein, the dressing may include one or more layers that filter the light (e.g., UVA and/or UVB) passed. For example, any of these dressings may include an additional layer (e.g., a “scrim” fabric) molded into the edges of the gel in order to attach to a polyurethane thin film.
  • In any of these variations, the medicament may be arranged in columns that are orientated perpendicular to the surface of the dressing. See, e.g., FIG. 15. In this example, a mostly open very thin fabric layer on the top may make the patch more visually appealing, while permitting light (UVA and/or UVB light) to pass through. The hydrogel may contain a water retaining humectant such as sorbitol. The medicament may be mixed in a water absorbing compound and arranged in a distributed pattern (e.g., see FIG. 16). In some variations the water absorbing compound is a hydrocolloid that lines the edges of the hydrogel that reduces or prevents odor.
  • Also described herein are methods (including the use of a device of apparatus for performing these methods, such as software, firmware, and/or hardware, including an application software for a handheld device, such as a smartphone) that automatically sets the recommended amount of sun (and/or therapeutic light) exposure based on the local UV index.
  • For example, FIG. 15 illustrates an exploded view of an occlusive dressing with a hydrogel containing a medicament for treatment of a skin condition with multiple layers including a thin film polyurethane with a pressure-sensitive adhesive such as acrylic 1501, a fabric layer 1503, a medicament 1509 at a concentration of <10% that is both UV blocking and UVA photosensitizing in suspension in hydrophilic gel that passes UVB light and blocks UVA light. The blocking layer 1505 could be a band pass filter that allows 300-320 nm, a low pass filter that passes light below 320 or a band blocking filter that blocks between 320-380 nm. An example of a band block filter would be a coating of HEXYL 2-[4-(DIETHYLAMINO)-2-HYDROXYBENZO, Terephthalylidene dicamphor sulfonic acid, Meradimate, Bisdisulizole Disodium, Uvinol A Plus, or Avobenzone which significantly blocks UVA light between 320-380. An example of a band pass or low pass filter would be a fused silica layer that passes light between 300-320 nm. FIG. 15 also includes a thin, visually appealing and mostly open thin fabric 1503 which would allow most of the UV light pass through it but may mask the hydrogel and the lesion that it is covering. The hydrogel layer 1509 in FIG. 15 also illustrates how the medicament could be placed in columns that are orientated perpendicular to the surface of the dressing. This type of orientation would allow for the light to pass through at a transmission that was roughly equivalent to the percentage of the UV blocking medicament in the dressing. For example, if the medicament was 10% orientated perpendicular to the surface of the dressing and roughly parallel with the UV light entering the hydrogel, the transmission would approach 90%. This figure also demonstrates how a scrim material 1507 could be partially molded into the hydrogel and allow for attachment of the hydrogel to the polyurethane thin film around the edges of the hydrogel, which may not otherwise readily adhere directly to the polyurethane thin film. With the UV blocking scrim on the border, it may allow light to transmit freely to the lesion. In order to prevent the hydrogel from losing water, a humectant may be added to prevent water loss. Examples of humectants are Propylene glycol, hexylene glycol, and butylene glycol, Glyceryl triacetate, Neoagarobiose, Sugar alcohols (sugar polyols) such as glycerol, sorbitol, xylitol, maltitol, Polymeric polyols such as polydextrose, Quillaia, Urea, Aloe vera gel, MP diol, Alpha hydroxy acids such as lactic acid, Honey, Egg yolk and egg white, Lithium chloride, Sodium hexametaphosphate E452i. As described herein, however, in some variations it may be particularly beneficial to avoid humectants such as sorbitol or glycerol, or which may act as surfactants.
  • FIG. 16 shows an example of a medicament, such as coal tar, mixed in a hydrocolloid and arranged in a distributed pattern to allow for distribution of the medicament to the lesion. This distribution pattern could be a checked, spherical, hexagonal, zig zag, or any other pattern that distributes the medicament relatively evenly over the treatment lesion. The hydrocolloid as a tacky, water absorbent material could also increase adherence of the dressing to the skin. In addition the hydrocolloid could be distributed around the edges of the dressing without the medicament to increase adherence and prevent a medicament from escaping, thereby reducing the odor of a medicament such as coal tar.
  • Any of the dressing described herein may be configured to include a hydrophobic layer. For example, FIG. 19A illustrates an embodiment of a dressing assembly that includes a hydrophobic thin film 1903 that eliminates, or reduces the absorption of skin solutions during wear. They hydrophobic layer 1901 may also be configured to aid in the delivery of the medicament to the skin. The hydrophobic layer may be applied to the hydrogel after polymerization (e.g., when the hydrogel comprises a thin film of medical grade silicone lubricant), or may be added to the hydrogel surface during polymerization. Another embodiment may comprise an antiperspirant in a layer between the hydrogel and the skin to reduce the absorption of skin solutions into the hydrogel. Any of these dressings may also have a thin film (e.g., a UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier 1905) placed on top of the hydrogel that is UVB clear and resistant to any UV transmission degradation due to contact with skin solutions (including urea, salts, sebum), medicaments within the hydrogel, other dressing assembly materials, or any typical skin products that may be used. In FIG. 19A, the film may be a 0.001″ ETFE thin film 1905. The film may cover a single side of the hydrogel, or it may wrap around the side edges of the base. The film may not cover the surface of the base that is in contact with the skin. The layer may be between 50 and 100% UVB transmissive to wavelengths between 300-320 nm. The moisture vapor transmission rate (MVTR) of the material may be adjusted by puncturing holes or channels through the thin film layer. The material may be composed of Teflon, FEP or ePTFE derivatives. The layer may also be composed of fluorosilicones. The layer may be immobilized against the hydrogel layer to avoid smearing of any coal tar or medicament that may come in contact with the film.
  • In any of the dressing described herein, the dressing may also include an optional a paper carrier 1097. The base or body of the dressing 1909 may be formed of a thin film of material (e.g., PU), and may have an open window or center region across which the medicament (e.g., the hydrogel with the coal tar/coal tar extract 1901) may be extended. The dressing may also include a medical lubricant 1903, and/or a release liner 1911.
  • The hydrogel may be configured for securing within the window, and may also be configured to prevent shrinking, and particularly contraction, of the hydrogel in use, including with dehydration. Contraction may thicken the hydrogel and may decrease the UV transparency. In some variations a mechanical support, such a scrim material 1915 (e.g., a mesh or grid of fibers) may extend through and from the edge region of the hydrogel. In some variations the scrim extends completely through the hydrogel; in other variations, the scrim extends through just a region or portion of the hydrogel, e.g., in the x and y directions of the plane of the hydrogel.
  • FIGS. 19B and 19C illustrate another example of a dressing. In FIG. 19B, the dressing is shown in an exploded view, with the base 1951, which may include an adhesive for holding it onto the skin (and temporarily holding the release liner 1954 over the otherwise exposed hydrogel 1901). A UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier 1953 may extend across the window 1955 through the base. The UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be formed of any material that is a vapor occlusive barrier, that is both chemically inert and inert with respect to the UV transparency. Specifically the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier may be a coating or thin film (e.g., having a thickness of less than 0.005 inches (e.g., less than 0.004 inches, less than 0.003 inches, less than 0.002 inches, less than 0.001 inches, etc.). The material forming the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier should remain transparent even when contacted with acids/bases and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that may otherwise for greater than some amount of time (e.g., 1 day, 2 days, 7 days, one month, 2 months, 100 days, 150 days, 6months, 1 year, etc.) does not change its UV transparency by more than a fixed percent (e.g., 10%, 7.5%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%) when exposed to a compatible compound (e.g., a solvent, acid, base or VOC) at room temperature. The compatible compounds comprises: solvents, acids, bases and volatile organic compounds, and particularly: Acetylsalicylic acid, Ascorbic acid, Aluminum hydroxide, Salicylic acid, Ammonium hydroxide, Calcium hydroxide, Sodium hyphochlorite (bleach), Sodium carbonate, Sodium bicarbonate, Benzene, Formaldehyde, Chloroflourocarbons, alcohols (e.g., benzyl, ethyl, isobutyl, methyl, etc.), Coal tar, Creosotes, Ammonia Nitrate, Uric acid, Urocanic acid, Hydrogen peroxide, Naptholene, Sulfates (sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium laureth sulfate), Phenols, P-Amino Benzoic Acid, and Pyridoxine.
  • In FIGS. 19B and 19C, the UV transparent, vapor occlusive barrier is formed of an ETFE material, such as Tefzel. This material (at thickness less than about 0.005 inches) is substantially UV-transparent (e.g., >90%), chemically resistant, and does not change UV transparency significantly after >100 hours of exposure to the compatible compounds listed above. In addition to the ETFEs mentioned above, fluoropolymers that are optically (and particularly UV) transparent may also work.
  • Returning to FIG. 19B, the hydrogel 1901 is formed into a layer into which coal tar is held (e.g., as micro-globules, clusters, lines, columns, etc.) and a scrim border 1912 extends along all four sides (in the x and y direction of the plane of the layer). As mentioned, this configuration may help secure the hydrogel across the window to the base 1951, but may also prevent the hydrogel from contracting in the x and y direction (and therefore thickening in the transverse z direction). Anchoring or otherwise preventing the hydrogel, e.g., in this example using a scrim material that extends out of the hydrogel and attaches to the frame of the dressing, may prevent the gel from contracting in the x or y directions. The frame may therefore be sufficiently “rigid” and/or may be adhesively anchored to the skin. Thus, with wear, the dressing may thin-out in the z-direction (lose thickness), due in part to syneresis (e.g., loss of water from the gel) and degradation of the hydrogel material. In practice, this does not appear to greatly affect UV transmission. The inventors have performed studies showing that contraction of the hydrogel (in the x and y direction) contributes to UV transmission loss. By securing the hydrogels in the dressing, gel contraction is minimized, and UV transmission loss over time may also be significantly minimized For example, FIG. 39 illustrates the effect of contraction on a hydrogel including a coal tar/coal tar extract (b/w 0.025% and 10%). In FIG. 39, the data shows the divergence of U.V. transmissivity between gels that are restrained from contracting in the x-y direction (triangles) vs gels that are allowed to contract in the x-y direction (squares). Hydrogels that are restrained remain visually clearer than the unrestrained gels and over time exposed to air (dehydration time) there is substantial loss of UV transmission, as shown.
  • As used herein, a ‘scrim’ material may be a reinforcement material and may be woven or non-woven. The scrim may be formed of fibers or strands. For example, the scrim may be a polyester or cellulose material. In some variations the scrim is polyester and adheres to the base (e.g., a polyurethane base). Typically a polyester scrim does not wick away water from the gel towards the PU adhesive, which may increase adherence of PU to skin.
  • In FIG. 19B, the dressing also includes a perimeter or boarder layer of hydrocolloid material that, as described above, may help prevent odors and may protect the hydrogel (with coal tar) layer. Any of the dressings described herein may also include one or more couplers to couple a UV light source to the dressing in a fixed position. For example, in FIG. 19B four magnetic contacts (which may be magnetic themselves, or may be a material to which a magnet may attach) on the dressing. The couplers in this example are peripheral to the window. In other variations, the couplers may be surrounded by the window region. FIG. 19C shows an example of the dressing of FIG. 19B assembled, having a relatively flat profile.
  • In forming the dressing shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the gel may be heat cured (e.g., at between 30-40° C. for between 1-4 hours, e.g., 2 hours at 35° C.). As will be described in more detail below, a very high salt (e.g., MgCl2), such as between 5% and 50% (weight of salt to weight of gel total) may be added to the hydrogel. For example 10% MgCl2 may be used which may help keep the coal tar globules or clusters from dissolving into the gel. Although coal tar has a low solubility in aqueous solution, it does have a very low rate of dissolution, which may be increased or assisted by other compounds, including, as identified by the inventors humectants such as sorbitol and glycerol. As coal tar dissolves into solution, the inventors have found that the U.V. transmittance of that solution decreases. In the context of the dressings described herein, a decrease in U.V. transmittance may require a longer treatment time (given that power output from the light cannot be increased) or may make treatment with the dressing impossible or impractical. To address this, the inventors found that MgCl2 at 5% or greater (e.g., 7.5%, 10%, 15%, etc.) increases the hydrophobic effect of the coal tar, which may lead to tighter coal tar globule formation and lower coal tar solubility, and therefore a higher equilibrium UV transmittance. Sorbitol had previously been used in the gel formulation for its surfactant properties, however it leads to an increased solubility of coal tar in water. Typically the greater the percentage of MgCl2 the better the effect. However, 5% or more may be sufficient; if longer shelf life for the dressings (e.g., beyond one week, two weeks, three weeks, on month, two months, three months, six months, 1 year, etc.) is desired higher MgCl2 percentages (e.g., 7.5%, 10%, or more) may be used.
  • In any of the dressing described herein, when globules or microglobules of coal tar/coal tar extract are used, the sizes of the globules may be similar, so that they are predominantly within a predicted size range (e.g., +/−50% of the average size). In variations in which the coal tar globules (microglobules, e.g., between 10 and 100 μm diameter) dispersed throughout the hydrogel, they may be uniformly distributed throughout (e.g., homogenously).
  • Any of the dressing described herein may initially keep the medicament (e.g., coal tar) separate from the hydrogel for adding later. For example, the microglobules of coal tar may be initially separate from the hydrogel and combined either immediately after or shortly before applying the dressing to the patient. In some variation a removable or frangible cover may separate the medicament from the hydrogel. In some variations the medicament may be lyophilized or dried onto a material prior to to adding to a hydrogel. In some variations the medicament may be separately stored and injected or added into the hydrogel (e.g., by applying force to the dressing). In some variations, the microglobules of coal tar are suspended in a thin hydrophobic medium that is placed exposed to the hydrogel prior to or shortly after application, and the hydrophobic medium removed. For example, FIG. 20 illustrates a dressing in which the active agent 2005 (e.g., a medicament, such as coal tar) is kept separate from other portions of the dressing by a removable or frangible barrier 2003 that can be removed, or broken, to release the medicament immediately before or shortly after applying to the skin for treatment so that it can be combined with the hydrogel 2001. This variation may allow a consistent and predictable pattern of medicament (e.g., coal tart or coal tar extract) within the hydrogel.
  • The dressings described herein may be fabricated by any appropriate manner For example, FIG. 21 illustrates a method for introducing a medicament (e.g., tar) into the hydrogel matrix. The medicament 2101 in this example is combined with a magnetizing material, for example iron oxide. The magnetizing material may be left in the hydrogel matrix after polymerization, or may be removed. The medicament may be pre-filled in the mold 2100 prior to polymerizing the hydrogel. A magnetic field can be applied in order to draw the medicament solution through the hydrogel matrix as the gel is polymerizing. The electromagnet(s) 2105 can be cycled or reversed in order to modulate the rate or shape by which the coal tar is drawn into the matrix. This method may be used to draw crude coal tar, a coal tar extract, corticosteroids, salicylic acid, anthralin (dithranol), cade oil, vitamin D analogues (e.g., calcipotriene, anthralin, tazarotene, calcitriol), steroids, psoralen, aloe vera, jojoba, zinc pyrithione, capsaicin, acetic acid, urea, phenol, or any other medicament known to one skilled in the art of skin therapy into the hydrogel matrix. The medicament may be a combination of medicaments. The hydrogel matrix can be cured heat, UV light, or by addition of a curing agent.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a method for introducing a medicament such as coal tar into the hydrogel matrix. The coal tar may be mechanically drawn up into an instrument along with other liquid components of a hydrogel matrix, mixed within the instrument, and subsequently sprayed onto a dressing 2205. Another embodiment draws up the coal tar 2201 and hydrogel solution 2203, mixes the solutions, and injects the mixed solutions into a mold. The dressing may be a hydrogel or hydrocolloid, or a plastic thin film that is occlusive to the skin, or any combination thereof. The coal tar solution may be crude coal tar, or may be pre-mixed with hydrogel or hydrocolloid components. The hydrogel pre-crosslink may contain of the hydrogel components, or may contain a fraction of the gel components. A curing agent may be applied within the spraying instrument. The hydrogel may be cured using heat, UV light, or a curing agent.
  • Also described herein are dressing in which the amount of material (e.g., coal tar) may be actively changed or redistributed before or after application to the skin. For example, FIG. 23 illustrates a method for dispersing a medicament (e.g., coal tar) away from the treatment area during light irradiation. The coal tar solution within a dressing may be combined with a magnetizing material, as discussed above. The magnetized coal tar solution may be dispersed within in the dressing. As coal tar, may block the therapeutic UV light from reaching the skin (e.g., as discussed above), moving the coal tar away from the skin prior to and/or during the application of UV light may enhance the therapeutic effects. In FIG. 23, the coal tar solution 2301 may either be a liquid that is contained within a pouch or may be unbounded within a hydrogel matrix. Magnets 2305 on the light device may draw the coal tar solution to the corners of the dressing 2307 and away from the treatment area. A magnet located centrally may be used in order to re-distribute the coal tar back towards the center. The coal tar may also or alternatively return to even distribution by diffusion of coal tar solution over time. In other embodiments, the user may redistribute the coal tar solution by manually pushing the solution around in the gel. The light device may have more magnets distributed around the dressing to aid in drawing the coal tar away from the center. Another embodiment includes a magnetic bar that moves across the treatment area prior to the start of treatment in order sweep the coal tar solution to one side of the treatment area.
  • In some variations, the dressing may be manipulated (e.g., mechanically manipulated) once applied to the skin to control the amount of UV light that is passed through. In general, a “thicker” dressing may be desirable to include a large amount of available medicament that may be deployed on to and/or into the skin. However, light transmission through a thick dressing may be low or variable. Also described herein are dressings that may be modulated once applied to the skin to modify the thickness and therefore the transmission of medicament and/or UV light to the skin. For example, FIG. 24 illustrates a method for dispersing coal tar 2401 away from the treatment area during light irradiation. This embodiment includes a reservoir 2405 that has the capacity to be filled with coal tar suspension from the main treatment area 2405. A coal tar solution 2401 may be pushed into and out of the reservoir either by the patient 2407 or by contact with the light device. The reservoir may accept all of the coal tar suspension, or a portion of the overall coal tar solution, leaving a layer of coal tar solution left on the main treatment area that is much thinner 2409 allowing more therapeutic light to be transmitted to the skin. The coal tar solution may be pushed between the one or more reservoirs manually, or some elastic/mechanical aspect may be applied to either the reservoir or the main treatment area in order that the coal tar solutions tends to one or the other. A valve may be used between the reservoir and the main treatment area. The reservoir may contain a valve for re-filling/adding coal tar solution as necessary. Another embodiment uses multiple reservoirs.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an alternative method for dispersing the coal tar away from the treatment area during light irradiation, using the therapeutic light applicator. In this example, the coal tar 2501 is suspended in liquid form and contained within the dressing. When pressure is applied 2503 from the light device 2505, the liquid coal tar solution is spread away from the treatment area. Thus, a treatment area 2507 may be cleared, permitting more of the therapeutic light to be passed. After removal of the pressure, the coal tar solution moves back towards the main treatment area.
  • Thus, in general, any of the dressing described herein may permit optimization of UVB transparency of our dressing while in contact with the skin. For example, any of the dressing described herein may regulate the dose of light (UV light) by stopping or limiting the absorption of UV absorbing components from sweat by adding a thin hydrophobic layer between the hydrogel and the skin. For example, a dressing may include a thin film that is placed on top of the hydrogel that is UVB clear and chemically inert to coal tar, like a fluorosilicone or Teflon based film to prevent compounds from degrading the UV transparency of the top layer of the dressing. Also described herein are dressings that stop exudate of UV absorbing components from the skin by adding an antiperspirants layer between the hydrogel and the skin.
  • As described above, any of these dressings may make UV absorbing components released from the skin (detritus, sweat, oils) non-UV absorbing. Other modifications to the dressing may regulate the amount of UVA/UVB passed. For example, any of these dressing may compensate for UVB transparency lost by placing a UVB detector in the light, potentially with a small UV reflector (Mylar) on the underside of the dressing.
  • The medicament may be distributed in a pattern that permits the passing of therapeutic light to the skin while still permitting contact with the medicament on the skin. For example, the medicament may be distributed in a pattern that permits the light passing, or it may include one or more channels, guides, or passages (including light guides) through the otherwise light absorbing/blocking medicament. For example, any of these apparatuses may include one or more layers of a hydrocolloid in a pattern that the hydrogel is molded around. In some examples, the coal tar is arranged in columns perpendicular to the top surface of the dressing; in general, the coal tar may be aggregated in any pattern (e.g., aggregated in specific patterns in the hydrogel). For example, the coal tar may be added to the hydrogel in micro needles to insert the coal tar in columns. Alternatively or additionally, the coal tar (or other medicament) may be mixed with a magnetizing material (e.g., iron oxide) in a strong magnetic field to orientate the medicament, e.g., in columns.
  • In some variations, the dressing may be made to include channels in the dressing for the coal tar where it can only exit on one side, such as a hollow wax tube that is open only on one side.
  • In general, the medicament may be displaced away from the skin without removing the dressing. For example, the dressing may be massaged or otherwise manipulated to move the medicament out of the way during treatment: e.g., pushed out of the way with electromagnets (when combined with a ferromagnetic material) and/or pushed out of the way mechanically into the sides or into a reservoir, such as using a roller pins (e.g., magnetic roller pin) that pushes the medicament out of the way by a magnetic field and/or mechanically.
  • Any of the dressings described herein may also be adapted to prevent the drop in transmission over time that may occur if the coal tar dissolves, and/or if the amount of water in the medicament (hydrogel) decreases over time. For example, a water-absorbing hydrocolloid borer may be positioned around the hydrogel portion of the apparatus. In addition, one or more salts (particularly MgCl2) may be added to the hydrogel. For example, any of the dressings described herein may include a crosslinked hydrogel matrix of 10-90% water, 0.1-10% coal tar suspended in the crosslinked hydrogel matrix, and 1-60% mineral salts (Mg, Ca, Na, Cl, etc.) dissolved in the water (e.g., 10-50% mineral salts, 20-40% mineral salts, etc., including any sub ranges thereof).
  • In addition, hydrogel water loss in the packaging or after application may cause adhesion degradation of the the thin film, as well as hydrogel water loss during wear (which may also cause a loss of adhesion of the dressing). The water absorbing hydrocolloid border around the hydrogel may further address this. Although it is common practice to include a surfactant as part of the hydrogel composition, and such composition are described herein, in some variations it may be beneficial to remove all surfactants from the composition, so that it is surfactant-free. Thus, any of the apparatuses and compositions described herein (e.g., any of the dressing) may exclude surfactants from the hydrogel.
  • Delivery of Phototherapy Dose
  • Also described herein are methods and apparatuses configured to deliver one or more doses, and preferably a series of doses, including daily or every-other-daily doses, or more than once daily. Doses may be delivered automatically, manually or semi-automatically (e.g., in which the dose is calculated automatically, but may be manually triggered). Thus, the methods and apparatuses may be configured to allow automatically delivering doses or assisting in delivering them. For example, described herein are methods for applying light therapy, and/or for regulating the use of any of the dressing described herein for phototherapy (e.g., treatment of a skin condition such as psoriasis).
  • Any of these methods may be performed completely or in part using an an apparatus including control logic such as software, hardware, firmware or some combination thereof, to treat. The control logic may be executable on a hand-held apparatus such as a tablet, smartphone, wearable electronics (smartwatch, glasses, etc.) to regulate and/or control the application of treatment to the subject, including apply light therapy and/or instructing the user when to remove or adjust the dressing or light applicator, and/or when to cover the treatment area from exposure to environmental light. Any of these apparatuses and/or methods may track and monitor doses over time, including over days, weeks or months. Any of these apparatuses and/or methods may use information based on the user's environment, including ambient light exposure, to adjust applied therapy or dressing.
  • Described herein are apparatuses, including control logic that is configured as a non-transitory machine-readable medium that stores instructions, which, when performed by a machine, cause the machine to perform operations. For example, this control logic may be configured as software that is executable on a device, such as a dedicated device, including the therapeutic light applicator, and/or a processor in communication with the device, such as a smartphone. The control logic may be configured to collect and provide information to/from the user (e.g., via one or more user interfaces) allowing the user to control the application of the light therapy to one or more lesions on the user's body. The control logic may track the therapy applied. The control logic may also determine how much therapy to be applied, as will be described in greater detail below. For example, FIGS. 38A-38G illustrate user interfaces showing tracking of treatment doses between different lesions. The user interfaces described herein may be adapted to allow a user to easily and reliably control the light dose applied in a manner that is not possible manually. For example, FIGS. 17A-17K illustrate user interfaces for one variations of a control logic (e.g., software) for controlling/regulating a light therapy (light source) as described herein.
  • In FIG. 17A the user interface (shown adapted for display on a touchscreen, may permit the user to connect to the light source, start/stop treatment, and view use, report treatment information (e.g., to a remote server, electronic medical record, etc.), detect connection between the dressing and/or patient (e.g., a magnetic frame/guide on the patient even if a dressing is not used), calculate dose, and the like. The control logic may guide the patient through the application of the dose(s) to one or more body regions (lesions on the body). For example, the control logic may confirm a connection is made between the dressing and the therapeutic light source (applicator), and instruct the user to reapply or adjust the attachment. The control logic may also warn the user to apply eye protection (FIG. 17B). The control logic may then calculate the dose to be applied (see below) and/or control the applicator to apply the dose (FIG. 17C), while coordinating which lesions receive doses. As shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E the control logic may control a handheld electronic device to communicate with the therapeutic light source (applicator), and may turn on/off the therapeutic light source (applicator) and otherwise regulate the therapeutic light source to apply the determined dose automatically as shown in FIG. 17F, permitting the user to override the application if necessary.
  • In any of these variations, the applicator may monitor the delivered dose to confirm that the applicator remains against the body (FIG. 17G), for example, by determining that the applicator is coupled to the dressing. The control logic may also regulate the operation of the therapeutic light source, including preventing the therapeutic light source from overheating or otherwise operating outside of optimal parameter bounds (FIG. 17H). The control logic may also receive confirmation that the dose was applied, including confirmation that the light(s) of the therapeutic light source turned on (FIG. 17I).
  • As will be described in greater detail below, the control logic may generally determine and control the dose applied by the therapeutic light source (applicator). This may be particularly important in the determination of partial doses, which are generally not considered under current treatment methods. Partial doses may occur, for example, when a subject is treated for a portion of the dosing time that is interrupted. An interruption may occur because the user terminates the session, or because of device failure, because the therapeutic light source is accidentally or intentionally removed from the dressing (or frame), or the like. In such situations, a complete dose is not delivered, but it may be particularly difficult to know when to apply the subsequent dose in order to provide optimal effective therapy; application of a new dose too early may result in burning or harming the skin, and waiting too long may result in too little dosing, resulting in ineffective or less effective treatment.
  • In FIG. 17J, the control logic (application software) regulates the delivery of a dose for a calculated dose period (e.g., 45 seconds). If the dose is terminated early, the apparatus may prevent an additional dose from being delivered, as shown in FIG. 17K. The timing to the next dose may be estimated based on the partial dose applied. Alternatively, the apparatus may calculate a partial dose to be applied immediately and present the user with the option to continue/apply this additional dose.
  • In some variations the control logic may also or alternatively be used to regulate the amount of ambient (natural) light, and particularly natural UV light that could benefit the user. For example, the apparatus (control logic) may use one or more indicators of ambient UV light to determine how long the user should allow or benefit from exposure to natural light. Alternatively or additionally, the amount of natural light exposure may be used in determining a therapeutic does from a therapeutic light source (applicator). Alternatively or additionally the amount and timing of a therapeutic light application to the patient may be combined with ambient UV light (from sun exposure) to provide a user with an indicator of how much light exposure to allow.
  • For example, FIG. 18 describes a method, which may be implemented automatically using a set of instructions that, when executed, control an electronics device such as a smartphone to automatically set and/or display a recommended amount of sun exposure based on the local UV index. In this example, the user's location may be determined by GPS from the handheld device (e.g., smartphone), user input, or other location service such as IP address or WiFi signal. The control logic may then determine a UV index from an online database that provides the daily index based location (e.g., zip code or other location identifier). The control logic (e.g., app) may then estimate the minimal erythema dose for the patient based on previous light exposure, skin type, ethnicity, location of the lesions, age, skin pigmentation, etc. In some variations the output may be used automatically by providing a timer for the patient to indicate the time of sun exposure.
  • For example, any of the dressings provided herein may be used with this control logic to provide a user guidance on the amount of time that they may be exposed to sunlight when wearing the dressing (or when not wearing a dressing) for treatment of a lesion. This information may also or instead be used to determine a dose and/or dosing regimen based on the amount of light to be applied by the therapeutic light source that may connect to the dressing.
  • As discussed above, any of the apparatuses described herein may be configured to determine, confirm, and/or detect contact between the therapeutic light applicator and the dressing or frame for securing the therapeutic light applicator to the patient over a lesion. For example, described herein are dressings and/or therapeutic light applicator securing frames that detect contact with the therapeutic light applicator. Contact may be detected magnetically, electrically, mechanically, or some combination thereof. For example in some variations the contact may be determined magnetically. For example, described herein area apparatuses and methods of detecting contact between a dressing and a therapeutic light applicator. Either or both the dressing (or other holder for the therapeutic light applicator) and the therapeutic light applicator may include a sensor to detect/determine and/or quantify contact between the two. Thus, any of these apparatuses (systems, devices, etc., including therapeutic light applicators) may measure the contact, including, for example, measuring the change in a magnetic field when a magnet on a dressing comes in contact with a larger magnet on the therapeutic light applicator.
  • For example, in some variations one or both of the therapeutic light applicator and dressing including a magnetic field concentrator consisting of a ferromagnetic strip that extends at least 0.5″ from the small magnet on the dressing with a hall effect sensor positioned above the end of the ferromagnetic strip (farthest away from magnets) in vertical alignment with axis of magnetic field. For example, a Hall Effect sensor may be calibrated when a proximity sensor identifies that it is not in contact with a surface and then detects a change in a magnetic field when the proximity sensor identifies that is in contact with a surface. This configuration may permit the detection of the magnetic field and therefore contact between the therapeutic light applicator and the applicator. FIGS. 26-29 illustrate variations of therapeutic light applicators and dressings that are configured to sense contact between the two. For example in FIG. 26, a Hall Effect sensor is included with a ferromagnetic concentrator. In the inset box B in FIG. 26, showing an alternative configuration, the concentrator is folded on itself at the end closest to the Hall Effect sensor, which may increase the change in the magnetic field.
  • In FIG. 26, the Hall Effect sensor is orientated horizontal to the axis of the magnetic field and positioned on the bottom of the large magnet closest to the small magnet. FIG. 26 shows how a ferromagnetic material is used as a concentrator to enhance Hall Effect sensing. With the use of the concentrator, the Hall Effect sensor can be moved further away from the small magnet and in turn the big magnet. This reduces the effects of the large magnet in overwhelming the sensor. When the patch and the light unit are in contact, a very large magnet will in effect be attached to the end of the concentrator, making the other end of it strongly magnetic and the Hall Effect sensor can pick up a large change in magnetic field. The concentrator can be made more effective by putting a fold in the end of the ferromagnetic strip, underneath the Hall Effect sensor, as shown in the orange box in FIG. 26.
  • Alternatively, in FIG. 27, the Hall Effect sensor is oriented vertically. Similarly, FIG. 28 schematically illustrates another example of a hell effect sensor. In FIG. 28, the Hall Effect sensor is placed in the center of the ring magnet with sensing axis perpendicular to magnet axis. In FIGS. 26-28 the light applicator or a processor communicating with the light applicator (such as a processor running any of the control logic described herein) may magnetically detect contact between the light therapy source (light) and the dressing (patch).
  • FIG. 27 shows another configuration for using the Hall Effect sensor. When close enough to the large cylindrical magnet in this position, the magnetic field of the large magnet in the sensing axis may not be very high because most of the field lines run vertically along the height of the cylinder. This allows the Hall Effect sensor to not get overwhelmed by the large magnet and can be used to pick up the presence of the small magnet when the light unit is in contact with the patch. The field readings taken from the Hall Effect sensor may be subject to drift over time. The therapeutic light applicator unit may therefore be able to calibrate its “on dressing” field and “off dressing” field by: a proximity sensor (or an IR reflector, as described in FIG. 29) that may be used to decide if the therapeutic light applicator unit is positioned on the dressing and calibrate the hall sensor reading as “On state” or “Off state” accordingly; and/or by always assuming the therapeutic light applicator is off the dressing upon startup and once it has been placed on the dressing (or taken off the dressing and placed back on the dressing) recognize the increase in magnetic field and calibrate the “On state”. In some variation the therapeutic light applicator may start with a broad calibration range guess for the “On state” and even if one of the, e.g., 2 (or 4), Hall Effect sensors fall within that guess range, assume the device is placed on top of the dressing and calibrate all sensors with finer precision to their “On state”. If none of the sensor readings fall within the initial guess range, the system may assume that the therapeutic light applicator is not on the dressing and calibrate all sensors to “Off state”.
  • Other, non-magnetic contact sensing configurations may also or alternatively be used. For example, contact between a therapeutic light applicator and a dressing may be done optically. FIG. 29 shows an example of contact sensing using an optical detector in which a dressing having an MIRC ink signature is read by the light using a MIRC reader. A reflector on the surface of the dressing may confirm contact when an emitter transmits a signal that is received by a small receiver (e.g., on the therapeutic light applicator).
  • FIG. 29 shows how an IR proximity sensor, or similar device with an emitter and a receiver, can be used to sense the placement on dressing. Two parts of the dressing, away from the treatment area, can be covered by a shiny material such as aluminum, gold, or Mylar, IR reflective paint, tape or fabric for increased flexibility. In the correct placement of the light unit, these IR reflective surfaces may be positioned directly underneath the IR proximity sensor. Because they would be so much more IR reflective than skin or other natural surfaces, this can be used to detect the presence of the patch.
  • In any of these variations, the apparatus (e.g., control logic, such as software/firmware/hardware, including non-transitory machine-readable medium that stores instructions) may calculate and control the applied dose of light.
  • In general, a daily light dose may be calculated by calculating the estimated minimal erythema dose (MED) of the patient remnant dose from prior treatments and then subtracting the remnant dose from the prior treatments to calculate the dose for that day. The remnant dose calculation may be a continuous function that is non-linear, as described below. The target dose may be a daily dose, and in general the target dose may be calculated when dose are missed based on a continuous function (e.g., which may be adapted from American Academy of Dermatology Guidelines, for example). The daily (or target) dose may be determined using the MED and photoadaptation rate of the patient. The first sensitization may give a current MED and provide an estimates photoadaptation rate; second sensitization may reset MED and give a photoadaptation rate. A third sensitization may set the photoadaptation limit. Subsequent sensitization may reset the photoadaptation limit by lowering by the photoadaptation rate.
  • In general, two or more sources of light, with at least two or more center wavelengths contained with a single light, may be “dose balanced” to provide equal contribution to minimum erythema dose by taking into account the number of sources of light, the distribution of light at a wavelength, the distribution of light across wavelength, the power output of each light, and the relative “weight” that each wavelength contributes to minimum erythema dose. The distribution of light may follow a Gaussian curve defined by a full width half maximum.
  • For example, FIG. 30 describes a method by which a daily light dose may be calculated from an estimated MED of the patient remnant dose from prior treatments and subtracting the remnant dose from the prior treatments to determine a dose for that day. The calculation of the remnant dose may be a continuous function that is non-linear. Calculation of the remnant dose may be done using the amount of the prior doses, the time from last dose, the prior remnant dose and various patient characteristics such as previous light exposure, skin type, ethnicity, location of the lesions, age, skin pigmentation, etc. Photoadaptation may be defined as the diminished future response to equivalent doses of irradiation. It is most often estimated in vivo by looking at changes in the minimal erythema dose with subsequent doses of UV radiation. The remnant dose calculation may be a continuous function that is non-linear. The daily dose may be calculated when dose are missed based on a continuous function adapted from American Academy of Dermatology Guidelines.
  • FIG. 31 describes in a detailed flow chart illustrating how a daily light dose may be determined by calculating the estimated MED of the patient remnant dose from prior treatments and then subtracting the remnant dose from the prior treatments to calculate the dose for that day. In this example, the apparatus (e.g., control logic, e.g., in the applicator software and/or the applicator) may calculate the does time and control the applicator to transmit the appropriate light dose based on the remnant dose (e.g., a remnant dose multiplier), estimated from the time since the last dose (based on a clock of the processor controlling the applicator and/or based on the applicator, or a stored time/date stamp), as well as an estimate of the minimal erythema dose. User input (e.g., burn/no burn) may also be used.
  • FIG. 32 shows a sample graph used to calculate current dose using a non-linear multiplier times prior dose based on the time from the last dose, determined as illustrated in FIG. 31. FIG. 33 shows a sample graph used to calculate current remnant dose using a non-linear multiplier times prior dose+prior remnant dose and the time from the last dose.
  • FIG. 34 describes a method by which the apparatus (including control logic) determining the daily dose also determines the MED and photoadaptation rate of the patient where the first sensitization gives current MED and provides an estimates photoadaptation rate, the second sensitization resets MED and gives photoadaptation rate, the third sensitization sets the photoadaptation limit and subsequent sensitizations resets the photoadaptation limit by lowering by the photoadaptation rate.
  • The relative contribution erythema from monochromatic light source is known (see, e.g., FIG. 35, adapted from Anders, Photochemistry and Biology, Vol 61, No. 2, pp 200-205, 1995). This information is relevant to the estimation of a therapeutic dose as described herein.
  • For example, as discussed above, multiple wavelengths (in UVA/UVB) may a balanced to apply a therapeutically effective dose. Thus any of the apparatuses described herein may be configured to apply multiple (e.g., 2, 3 or more) different wavelengths from the same applicator. FIG. 36 shows a distribution of LEDs at 2 different wavelengths in a single light source, including a plurality of 310 nm LED and a 303 nm LED. FIG. 37 shows a calculation of how to “dose balance” multiple light sources at different center wavelengths in order to provide equal contribution to minimum erythema dose by taking into account the number of sources of light, the distribution of light at a wavelength, the distribution of light across wavelength, the power output of each light and the relative “weight” each wavelength contributes to minimum erythema dose. The relative collimation of the light sources may also be used to provide the weighting between them. Thus an LED that is less collimated, decreasing the depth of light penetration, would be considered weaker than an LED that was more collimate, having an increased depth of penetration.
  • Thus, any of the apparatuses and methods described herein may provide dose balancing using multiple LEDs at different center wavelengths of light based on the relative contribution of each wavelength towards an erythemic dose. This may use the MED for different wavelengths from a monochromatic light source. Although the apparatus may otherwise be somewhat limited by the creation of erythema, the dose from each LED may be adjusted to contribute equally towards erythema. Without proper balancing, one source may cause erythema and the other source may not, making the overall dose less efficient. Since LEDs are fundamentally multi-chromatic, following a Gaussian distribution around a center wavelength and each wavelength has a different relative contribution to MED, this estimation for dose balancing must be adjusted accordingly.
  • The apparatuses and methods for determining dose described herein may be configured so that every time a treatment is initiated (e.g., each time the patient presses “start treatment”) this may be considered a dose. If the patient receives only a partial dose, then this partial dose is still considered a dose for purposes of determining the overall dose and setting the next dose. In some variations the apparatus may track the number of full doses delivered. Thus, the apparatus may take into account the amount of time it has been since the last dose, which may be called out as the remnant multiplier. If a patient gets interrupted halfway through their dose but completes the dose right away, then the combination of both doses is considered one dose. The applicator may communicate the dose delivered to the controller (control logic, e.g., on a smartphone or other controller). The control logic may send the right time to the applicator, but the applicator may communicate back to the control logic (e.g., the app on a smartphone) the amount of time that was delivered. This may provide a more robust signaling protocol. Every time that a connection is established between the applicator and the control logic (e.g., the smartphone), the applicator will tell the control logic the amount of time the light was on for the last lesion. The control logic may then use this data to calculate the next dose. Any number of lesions may be treated and tracked in this manner, including e.g., 2 or more, 3 or more, etc. (up to 200, 100, 30, etc.). Each lesion may be covered by a dressing and/or surrounded by a frame (magnetic frame) for mating to the applicator. A single applicator (and associated control logic) may be used to treat multiple lesions and mate with multiple dressings/frames. The control logic may track treatment of each lesion.
  • Table 2, below, illustrates one method of determining the dose of a lesion as discussed above.
  • TABLE 2
    Exemplary method of determining dose
    INITIAL DETAILED CASE
    VARIABLE NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION CASES EXPLANATION
    A Dose # 1 EACH TIME ALWAYS INCREMENT Every time patient
    PATIENT USES starts a dose, this
    APP is incremented. If
    their dose gets
    interrupted, it get
    incremented.
    B Running 0 STARTS AT PARTIAL DOSE OR TIME BETWEEN If only a partial
    Clock FIRST DOSE DOSES >=3.26 == CONTINUE dose is delivered,
    AND RUNS then you should be
    CONTINOUSLY able to deliver more
    light.
    >1008 == STOP 6 weeks of
    therapy with
    24 hours between
    doses is 1008 hours.
    TIME BETWEEN DOSES >384 == STOP This is 15 missed
    doses, which is
    inline with AAD
    guidelines for
    dosing. Patient
    needs to start over.
    FULL DOSE GIVEN DURING PRIOR DOSE Cannot do another
    AND TIME BETWEEN DOSES <3.26 == STOP dose for 3.26 hours
    because the equation
    puts the remnant dose
    at a negative number.
    C Burn from NO IS SKIN PATIENT INPUT
    last dose? SENSITIVE
    FROM LAST
    DOSE
    D Number 0 TOTAL NO BURN == SAME
    of burns NUMBER OF BURN, NOT FROM LAST == SAME
    BURNS FROM BURN FROM LAST == SAME
    ACTUAL
    DOSES (NOT
    CARRY OVER
    BURNS)
    E Healing 0 MULTIPLIER TIME SINCE LAST DOSE >52 == O
    (Remnant) USED FOR TIME SINCE LAST
    Multiplier ESTIMATING DOSE <=52 == EQUATION
    HEALING
    RESPONSE
    FROM LAST
    BURN
    F Estimated Z2 ESTIMATED NO BURN == MULTIPLY BY EQUATION
    MED MINIMUM BURN, NOT FROM LAST == REPEAT
    (EMED) ERYTHEMA BURN FROM LAST == SAFE DOSE
    DOSE (EMED)
    NOT MODIFIED
    BY TIME
    G Safe Z2*Z1{circumflex over ( )}2 LAST DOSE MAX SO CANNOT DROP BELOW STARTING
    EMED THAT DID NO SAFE DOSE (G6)
    CAUSE A NO BURN == MINIMUM BETWEEN
    BURN (MAXIMUM BETWEEN LAST SAFE DOSE
    (G) AND EMED (F) * % OF DOSE
    DELIVERED) AND CURRENT EMED (F)
    TO ACCOUNT FOR REDUCTIONS AFTER
    MULTIPLE BURNS
    BURN == MINIMUM OF LAST SAFE
    DOSE (G) AND LAST EMED (F) TO ACCOUNT
    FOR REDUCTIONS AFTER MULTIPLE BURNS
    H EMED 1 MULTIPLIER TIME BETWEEN DOSE
    Multiplier FOR EMED IS <=48 == RATIO
    1 THAT INCLUDES OF LAST EMED TO CURRENT EMED
    TIME BUT TIME BETWEEN DOSE IS >48
    NOT BURNS TO <=144 == 1 PLUS
    INCREMENT(S) * EQUATION THAT GOES
    TO FROM 1 AT 48 HOURS TO 0 AT
    144 HOURS
    TIME BETWEEN DOSE
    IS >144 == EQUATION
    THAT GOES FROM 1 AT 144
    HOURS TO .5 AT 384 HOURS
    I EMED 1 MULTIPLIER BURN == 1
    Multiplier FOR EMED NO BURN AFTER A BURN LAST
    2 THAT INCLUDES DOSE == MINIMUM OF 1
    TIME AND BURNS AND EMED MULTIPLIER 1 (H)
    SO THAT NEVER GOES ABOVE
    1 TO KEEP DOSE AT THE SAFE DOSE
    NO BURN PRIOR TWO
    DOSES == EMEM MULTIPLIER 1 (H)
    J EMED × Z2 EMED TIMES MAX SO CANNOT DROP BELOW INITIAL
    Multiplier MULTIPLIER SAFE DOSE (K9)
    2 BURN FROM LAST DOSE == SAFE
    DOSE (K) * EMED MULTIPLIER 2 (I)
    NO BURN OR BURN, NOT FROM
    LAST == LAST EMED (J) * EMED
    MULTIPLIER 2 (I)
    K Safe Z2*Z1{circumflex over ( )}2 LAST DOSE MAX SO CANNOT DROP BELOW STARTING
    EMED × THAT DID SAFE DOSE (K6)
    Multiplier NOT CAUSE NO BURN == MINIMUM BETWEEN
    ABURN (MAXIMUM BETWEEN LAST SAFE DOSE (K)
    AND EMED (J) * % OF DOSE DELIVERED)
    AND CURRENT EMED (J) TO ACCOUNT
    FOR REDUCTIONS AFTER MULTIPLE BURNS
    BURN == MINIMUM OF LAST SAFE
    DOSE (K) AND LAST EMED (J) TO
    ACCOUNT FOR REDUCTIONS AFTER
    MULTIPLE BURNS
    L Remnant 0 DOSE REMNANT MULTIPLIER (E) * SUM
    Dose REMAINING OF DELIVERED (P) + REMNANT (L)
    FROM
    PREVIOUS
    TREATMENT
    M Dose Z2*Z1 TODAYS DOSE NO BURN == EMED(J) * STARTING
    PERCENTAGE (A6) − REMANT (L)
    BURN == REPEAT
    N Time (sent Z2*Z1/Z5 TIME LIGHT NO BURN, NO
    to light) SHOULD BE PATCH == DOSE(M)/RADIANCE(V5)
    ON NO BURN, YES
    PATCH == DOSE(M)/RADIANCE(V5)/%
    TRANSMISSIONS)
    BURN == 0
    O Time TBD TIME LIGHT IS SENT FROM PHONE The phone will record
    Delivered ACTUALLY ON the amount of time that
    (sent to phone) the light is on and send
    this back to the phone
    along with the reason for
    therapy interruption,
    if that occurs.
    P Delivered TBD DOSE LIGHT NO BURN, NO PATCH = TIME (O) *
    Dose ACTUALLY RADIANCE (V5)
    DELIVERED NO BURN, YES PATCH = TIME (O) *
    RADIANCE (V5)/PATCH %
    TRANSMISSION (V6)
    YES BURN = REPEAT
    Q Increment Z3 INCREMENT NO BURN == INCREMENT BASED ON
    TO THE DOSE RATIO OF DELIVERED DOSE (P/M) *
    IF NO BURNS REMNANT DOSE MULTIPLIER
    BURN == REPEAT
    R # of Dose TBD EQUIVALENT USE NO BURN INCREMENT (Q) LOG
    TOTAL NUMBER OF INCREASE FROM BASE TO
    DOSES DETERMINE # FULL DOSES
    S Safe Z3 INCREMENT LESS THAN 4 DOSES, NO
    Increment THAT BURN == INCREMENT (Q)
    INCLUDES IF LESS THAN 4 DOSES, BURN ==
    THERE IS A C$6/24 OR MORE DOSES, NO
    BURN BURN == INCREMENT (Q)
    4 OR MORE DOSES, FIRST BURN, PRIOR
    DOSE NO BURN == MAX BETWEEN
    C$6/2 AND EQUATION CALCULATING
    SAFE DOSE BASED ON NUMBER OF
    DOSES  ®
    4 OR MORE DOSES, SECOND
    BURN == 0
    4 OR MORE DOSES, >2
    BURNS == −C$6
    T Time End 0 TRACKS TIME BURN == SAME
    of Dose* OF END OF NO BURN == RECORD
    LAST ACTUAL TIME FROM RUNNING CLOCK
    DOSE
    Z1 Starting % 0.9 FROM 0-3
    (TWO
    DECIMALS)
    Z2 MED 300 FROM 0-5000
    (NO
    DECIMALS)
    Z3 Increment 0.06 FROM 0.01-1
    (TWO
    DECIMALS)
    Z4 Increase 0.01 FROM 0.001-1
    (THREE
    DECIMALS)
    Z5 Radiance 5 FROM 0.01-
    100 (TWO
    DECIMALS)
    Z6 % Patch 0.5 FROM .01-1
    Trans (TWO
    DECIMALS)
    Z7 Use NO YES OR NO
    Patch?
  • Any of the methods for calculating a dose for light therapy described herein may use an estimate of the amount of light that would cause a sensitization or redness in the patient's skin, and may include subtracting a portion of that estimate based on the remaining healing time from previous doses. The remaining healing time may be based on a non-linear continuous function with inputs of time and dose, as described above. The previous doses may be those doses within the last 3 days (e.g., within the last 1 day, within the last 2 days, within the last 4 days, within the last 5 days, within the last 6 days, within the last 7 days, etc.). The previous doses may be the doses within the last 52 hours (e.g., within the last 48 hours, within the last 42 hours, within the last 36 hours, within the last 30 hours, within the last 24 hours, within the last 58 hours, etc.).
  • Any of the apparatuses for treating skin disorders described herein may be configured to compute/predict the dose, including using the recent past dose information (e.g., within the last 24 hours, 30 hours, 36 hours, 42 hours, 48 hours, 52 hours, 58 hours, etc.). For example an apparatus may include: a phototherapy unit, a dermal patch with a minimum of a hydrogel and coal tar, non-transient control logic for controlling a processor to use one or more independent variables of time since last dose and time duration of last dose to determine the current dose time duration.
  • Any of the methods described herein may include methods for calculating the time of current dose of dermal light therapy through a dressing. For example, any of these method may include a non-linear function with all or some of the following 5 independent variables: time of previous doses, size of previous doses, radiance of light, transmission of dressing and presence of skin sensitivity or redness from previous doses.
  • Any of the methods described herein may include an estimation of the dose time duration that would cause skin sensitization or redness and subtracts a portion of that time based on the estimated remaining healing time required as a result of previous doses.
  • EXAMPLES
  • In one example, a hydrogel dressing (e.g., “patch”) may be part of a system including a light applicator and/or a frame to which the dressing may attach (as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B). Either the frame or the dressing may include magnets for coupling to the light applicator. For example, the hydrogel dressing may be an approximately 2.5″×1.25″ hydrogel with a thin film 0.75″ border , ˜4% coal tar, and may be somewhat moisture occlusive (e.g., having an MVTR<x g/cm2/24hours). The dressing may be low or no-odor because of the occlusive properties. Optionally, the dressing may include an occlusive boarder (e.g., a wax/hydrocolloid) around the hydrogel to prevent odor escaping out the sides of the patch. If the dressing includes a hydrocolloid boarder, this could be highly tacky to help with adherence to the skin and to absorb fluid from the skin. The dressing may be worn for 3-7 days continuously, and may be UVA blocking (e.g., to protect against coal tar photosensitization to UVA light). The dressing may include a thin hydrophobic layer between the hydrogel and the skin to reduce absorption of compounds for the skin that block UV light. In some variations, the dressing may include an oleophobic (or lipophobic) layer/coating between the hydrogel and the polyurethane minimize the amount of coal tar absorbed by the polyurethane thin film (which is oleophillic, meaning it likes to absorb coal tar).
  • A therapeutic light applicator may include one two light modules (e.g. squares of 1.25″) connected with a small electric cable and a hinge for an effective therapy area of 2.5″×1.25″ with a UV blocking skirt. The “skirt” may contain a “living hinge” for flexing conforming to body curvatures (e.g., 180 degrees of flex, between 210-90 degrees of flex, etc.) and connects the two LED 1.25″×1.25″ modules while preventing light from escaping from the treatment area. The inner surfaces of the UV blocking skirt may be coated in reflective coating along with the bottom of the LED board to distribute light. Any of these apparatuses may include a wireless communication circuit (e.g., a Bluetooth connection), e.g., on the LED board, with a wired connection to a battery (e.g., a LIPO battery back w/micro USB charger). The circuitry (e.g., a rigid board) may be optimized (through vias or metal core) for heat conduction and attached directly to a heat sink and fan.
  • The LEDs for emitting the UV light may be laid out in any appropriate pattern. For example, the LEDs may be laid out so that 4×2 LEDs at a wavelength of 307+/−3 nm are arranged within the light emitting region. Alternatively or additionally, 4×2 LEDs at a wavelength of 308+/−3 nm and 2×1 LED at a wavelength of 303+/−3 may be arranged within the light emitting region(s). The LED positions may be optimized by distance and location on board for equal distribution of light across skin surface. The apparatus may include one or more lenses on the LEDs and/or reflectors on LEDs to distribute light across skin surface and/or collimate light for optimized absorption in skin surface. Any of these apparatuses may include temperature sensor for feedback to the microcontroller to optimize the amount of energy supplied to the LEDs. Alternatively or additionally, any of these apparatuses may include an IR proximity sensor and Hall Effect sensors to detect proximity to a surface and connection to the magnets on the dressing. Both may be used, as discussed above, in conjunction in order to detect a dressing since the Hall Effect sensors only detect a change in the magnetic field.
  • The light emitting region may be any appropriate shape, including square, rectangular, oval, circular, triangular, etc. Optionally, the apparatus may be configured to plug multiple lights into the same battery pack.
  • As discussed above, the control logic controlling the apparatus may generally be configured to determine an initial dose, Mx, may be based on minimal erythema dose (MED), prior treatment history, location of plaque on body, gender, age, ethnicity, skin pigmentation, skin type, plaque thickness and confidence of estimated MED. Based on input information and confidence of estimated MED is high, the starting dose will be more aggressive and close to MED (˜90% for example) but if confidence in estimated MED is low, the starting dose will be more conservative (˜70% of estimated MED, for example). Each time patient enters that their skin is not sensitive from prior dose, the dose may be increased until a sensitization occurs. The last dose that did not create a sensitization reaction may then be set as the MED. Each time the dose may be calculated based amount of remnant dose (R) (e.g., a time dependent variable which estimates the amount of dose left from prior dose). The increase of the dose may be called M′x. M′x is gradually increased each time. For instances if M′1 is 6% the second dose will be 106% of the initial dose. The increase of M′x is called M″. If M″ is 1%, then M′2 is 106.06%. M′3 is 106.1206″ and so on.
  • The control logic (e.g., control software, etc.) may track and regulate each lesion specifically and/or separately. For example, a patient with eight lesions may have all eight lesions tracked separately (and the light controlled separately) for each lesion. In some variations the control logic may determine which lesion corresponds to which dressing. The apparatuses described herein may also take and track images of the lesions. For example, the control logic (app) can take and display images of lesion with an option to re-take image or rate if lesion is better or worse than previous. In some variations, the control logic (e.g., app) can display the results of dosing for each lesion in text or graphical form. User information such as MED, location of plaque on body, gender, age, ethnicity, skin pigmentation, skin type, plaque thickness can be entered into control logic along with how variable for determining the dose increase.
  • The apparatuses (light applicator and/or dressings) may be made available in different sizes and/or shapes. For example, a small size may be 1″×1″ and may have a single magnet in the middle (instead of at the four corners). A larger size may be 5″×5″ and may be flexibility in two planes (e.g., 4 2.5″×2.5″ light modules with living hinges).
  • In any of the dressings descried herein, the dressing may be comfortable for occlusive treatment of skin conditions with medicaments, especially psoriasis, vitiligo and dermatitis. For example, these dressing may pass UVB light by putting UV absorbing medicament in suspension or orientating it in parallel with light, and may block UVA light. As discussed above, the control logic may set time of exposure based on local UV index. In general, the dressing may include a strong, non-damaging attachment to the skin and may deliver a consistent dose of coal tar over a multi-day wear. These dressing may be low- or no-odor, and may be generally worn for 5 days of wear (or longer). The outer surface may include a UVB permeable thin fabric cover. Thus, described herein are dressings including a medicament that are both UV blocking and UVA photosensitizing in suspension in hydrophilic gel at a concentration of less than 10% that passes UVB light and blocks UVA light. The UVA blocking material may be, for example, HEXYL 2-[4-(DIETHYLAMINO)-2-HYDROXYBENZO.
  • In general, the dressing may be UVB transparent while in contact with the skin. For example, the dressing may be treated to stop or limit absorption of UV absorbing components from sweat, e.g., by adding a thin hydrophobic layer between the hydrogel and the skin. A thin film may be positioned on top of the hydrogel that is UVB clear and chemically inert to coal tar like a fluorosilicone or Teflon based film to prevent compounds from degrading the UV transparency of the top layer of the dressing. The dressing may also include an antiperspirants layer between the hydrogel and the skin to stop exudate of UV absorbing components from the skin. Any of these dressings may be configured to remove or limit UV absorbing components that may be released from the skin (e.g., detritus, sweat, oils).
  • Alternatively or additionally, any of these apparatuses may compensate for UVB transparency lost by placing a UVB detector in the therapeutic light applicator, in some variations along with a small UV reflector (e.g., Mylar or other material) on the underside of the dressing. Further, the medicament (e.g., coal tar) may be arranged in one or more orientations within the hydrogel (e.g., aggregating the coal tar in specific patterns in the hydrogel, using micro needles to insert the coal tar in pillars, using a magnetizing material mixed with the coal tar, e.g., iron oxide, with a strong magnetic field to orientate the coal tar in pillars, etc.).
  • Light may be effectively delivered to the scalp even in the presence of hair and the absorbing medicament (e.g., coal tar) by using one or more of the features described herein. For example, the dressing may be attached to the light applicator with rigid rods at corners to stabilize the light against the scalp, with internal semi rigid light guides that move as the attachment is lightly rotated on the scalp to part the hair and spread the light evenly, etc. In some variations, a conveyor belt attachment with bristles in alternating orientations may create parts in the hair and guide the light evenly across the scalp.
  • As discussed above, the contact between the dressing and the applicator may be sensed by, for example, measuring change in the magnetic field when a small magnet (on dressing) comes in contact with large magnet (from light applicator) by one or more of: adding a “concentrator” consisting of a ferromagnetic strip that extends, e.g., at least 0.5″ from the small magnet on the dressing with a hall effect sensor positioned above the end of the ferromagnetic strip (farthest away from magnets) in vertical alignment with axis of magnetic field. The strip may be folded at the end closest to the Hall Effect sensor increases the change in the magnetic field. A Hall Effect sensor may be orientated horizontal to the axis of the magnetic field and positioned on the bottom of the large magnet closest to the small magnet. Alternatively or additionally, a MIRC ink and reader may be used. Flux sensitivity within centerline of the magnet may be read by the device and may activate when all 4 magnets are doubled (the apparatus may include an upper limit as well to from large B fields from turning them on). In some variations a reflector on surface of the dressing and small receiver may be used to confirm contact.
  • In some variations an alternative to the dressing described herein may include a spray-on material, e.g., including a coal tar occlusive coating may be delivered directly to the scalp. For example, a siloxane may be mixed with coal tar that gels on contact with the skin through a combination of more than one compound. In some variations a comb finger pump delivery may be used. For example, a reservoir of gel including the medicament may be pumped into a needle applicator (e.g., into a plurality of teeth of the comb); the medicament may include an anti-itch material as well. In some variations adjacent comb channels may combine materials (e.g., forming the hydrogel). The mix may activate quickly to seal, and protect treatment but remains active to natural occurring UV.
  • Any of the medicaments described herein may include a melanin reducing agent to reduce the effect of photoadaptation. Examples of such agents may include: Alpha Arbutin; Tego Cosmo C; Kojic Acid; Gigawhite; Licorice Extract; Niacinamide (Vitamin B3); Sodium Ascorbyl Phosphate (Vitamin C); Mulberry Extract; Bearberry Extract; Lemon Juice Extract, etc. Any of these apparatuses may also include a magnetic attachment of the dressing to a base layer. For example, a ferromagnetic material may be arranged on the base layer of the dressing that is outside of a treatment area of the occlusive patch. The dressing may include magnets that are slightly larger than the ferromagnetic material to allow movement of the patch magnet relative to the base layer as the skin moves. As mentioned, in general the dressing may be UVA blocking but UVB passing.
  • In general, it may be helpful to secure the dressing around a lesion to be treated over multiple days of treatment in a secure, non-moving region. This is because the skin (including the region around a lesion) may adapt to the light therapy, so that when therapeutic light is applied to a region around the lesion during a treatment course for the first time mid-treatment (e.g., if the light source position changes from one treatment day to the next, exposing previously untreated skin) the patient may experience burning or other discomfort. Thus, in general, the dressings (and frames that may hold the light source in position even if no medicament is used) may be held stably against the skin between doses. An apparatus such as the one shown in FIGS. 4A or 4B may therefore be particularly useful. In this variation, the dressing may be divided up into a frame portion 402 (base) that may secure to the skin in a stable manner and may include one or more magnets for holding the light applicator and/or a medicament-holding patch (removable center 404). In some variations, when treating the skin with the light, the medicament-containing patch 404 may be removed and replaced with the light; the base 402 remains stable on the body. Thus, in this variation, the base includes an open center region (base 402) with high adhesion for multi-day wear, and may also include one or more magnetic (e.g., ferromagnetic) alignment features for coupling with a light source and/or a patch containing a medicament. The patch may be a semi-permanent occlusive, non-UV transmissive patch, with a medicament center and adhesive. If the placement changes during replacement of the semi-removable base, skin that had not previously been exposed to light may now be exposed. In In order to reduce the chances of a burn occurring on this new skin, the inner area of the semi-removable base may have partial transmissivity (10-90%) to light of 0.1 to 1 cm in width. This would expose the surrounding tissue to a partial dose of light and reduce the chances of a burn occurring if it was exposed after a dressing change.
  • In use, the daily dose of UVB light may be applied to a target area that increases daily. The penumbra of light exposure to tissue on the inside of the base dressing may prepare the surrounding skin. For example, in some variations the edge of the frame or base (or dressing) may have a tapering transmission of UV light, rather than an abrupt blocking of light. This may ease the edge-effects that would otherwise occur (e.g. burning of naive skin) if the frame/dressing shifts slightly on the skin, or when a new frame/dressing is applied.
  • Attachment of the occlusive dressing (and/or the patch portion) may be done with an adhesive such as a hydrocolloid, or silicone, and the dressing (and/or patch portion) may include one or more non-tacky regions that may allow the semi-permanent occlusive patch to be removed easily.
  • Any of the methods (including user interfaces) described herein may be implemented as software, hardware or firmware, and may be described as a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing a set of instructions capable of being executed by a processor (e.g., computer, tablet, smartphone, etc.), that when executed by the processor causes the processor to control perform any of the steps, including but not limited to: displaying, communicating with the user, analyzing, modifying parameters (including timing, frequency, radiance and/or power over skin area, etc.), determining, alerting, or the like.
  • When a feature or element is herein referred to as being “on” another feature or element, it can be directly on the other feature or element or intervening features and/or elements may also be present. In contrast, when a feature or element is referred to as being “directly on” another feature or element, there are no intervening features or elements present. It will also be understood that, when a feature or element is referred to as being “connected”, “attached” or “coupled” to another feature or element, it can be directly connected, attached or coupled to the other feature or element or intervening features or elements may be present. In contrast, when a feature or element is referred to as being “directly connected”, “directly attached” or “directly coupled” to another feature or element, there are no intervening features or elements present. Although described or shown with respect to one embodiment, the features and elements so described or shown can apply to other embodiments. It will also be appreciated by those of skill in the art that references to a structure or feature that is disposed “adjacent” another feature may have portions that overlap or underlie the adjacent feature.
  • Terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the invention. For example, as used herein, the singular forms “a”, “an” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. As used herein, the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items and may be abbreviated as “/”.
  • Spatially relative terms, such as “under”, “below”, “lower”, “over”, “upper” and the like, may be used herein for ease of description to describe one element or feature's relationship to another element(s) or feature(s) as illustrated in the figures. It will be understood that the spatially relative terms are intended to encompass different orientations of the device in use or operation in addition to the orientation depicted in the figures. For example, if a device in the figures is inverted, elements described as “under” or “beneath” other elements or features would then be oriented “over” the other elements or features. Thus, the exemplary term “under” can encompass both an orientation of over and under. The device may be otherwise oriented (rotated 90 degrees or at other orientations) and the spatially relative descriptors used herein interpreted accordingly. Similarly, the terms “upwardly”, “downwardly”, “vertical”, “horizontal” and the like are used herein for the purpose of explanation only unless specifically indicated otherwise.
  • Although the terms “first” and “second” may be used herein to describe various features/elements (including steps), these features/elements should not be limited by these terms, unless the context indicates otherwise. These terms may be used to distinguish one feature/element from another feature/element. Thus, a first feature/element discussed below could be termed a second feature/element, and similarly, a second feature/element discussed below could be termed a first feature/element without departing from the teachings of the present invention.
  • Throughout this specification and the claims which follow, unless the context requires otherwise, the word “comprise”, and variations such as “comprises” and “comprising” means various components can be co-jointly employed in the methods and articles (e.g., compositions and apparatuses including device and methods). For example, the term “comprising” will be understood to imply the inclusion of any stated elements or steps but not the exclusion of any other elements or steps.
  • In general, any of the apparatuses and methods described herein should be understood to be inclusive, but all or a sub-set of the components and/or steps may alternatively be exclusive, and may be expressed as “consisting of” or alternatively “consisting essentially of” the various components, steps, sub-components or sub-steps.
  • As used herein in the specification and claims, including as used in the examples and unless otherwise expressly specified, all numbers may be read as if prefaced by the word “about” or “approximately,” even if the term does not expressly appear. The phrase “about” or “approximately” may be used when describing magnitude and/or position to indicate that the value and/or position described is within a reasonable expected range of values and/or positions. For example, a numeric value may have a value that is +/−0.1% of the stated value (or range of values), +/−1% of the stated value (or range of values), +/−2% of the stated value (or range of values), +/−5% of the stated value (or range of values), +/−10% of the stated value (or range of values), etc. Any numerical values given herein should also be understood to include about or approximately that value, unless the context indicates otherwise. For example, if the value “10” is disclosed, then “about 10” is also disclosed. Any numerical range recited herein is intended to include all sub-ranges subsumed therein. It is also understood that when a value is disclosed that “less than or equal to” the value, “greater than or equal to the value” and possible ranges between values are also disclosed, as appropriately understood by the skilled artisan. For example, if the value “X” is disclosed the “less than or equal to X” as well as “greater than or equal to X” (e.g., where X is a numerical value) is also disclosed. It is also understood that the throughout the application, data is provided in a number of different formats, and that this data, represents endpoints and starting points, and ranges for any combination of the data points. For example, if a particular data point “10” and a particular data point “15” are disclosed, it is understood that greater than, greater than or equal to, less than, less than or equal to, and equal to 10 and 15 are considered disclosed as well as between 10 and 15. It is also understood that each unit between two particular units are also disclosed. For example, if 10 and 15 are disclosed, then 11, 12, 13, and 14 are also disclosed.
  • Although various illustrative embodiments are described above, any of a number of changes may be made to various embodiments without departing from the scope of the invention as described by the claims. For example, the order in which various described method steps are performed may often be changed in alternative embodiments, and in other alternative embodiments one or more method steps may be skipped altogether. Optional features of various device and system embodiments may be included in some embodiments and not in others. Therefore, the foregoing description is provided primarily for exemplary purposes and should not be interpreted to limit the scope of the invention as it is set forth in the claims.
  • The examples and illustrations included herein show, by way of illustration and not of limitation, specific embodiments in which the subject matter may be practiced. As mentioned, other embodiments may be utilized and derived there from, such that structural and logical substitutions and changes may be made without departing from the scope of this disclosure. Such embodiments of the inventive subject matter may be referred to herein individually or collectively by the term “invention” merely for convenience and without intending to voluntarily limit the scope of this application to any single invention or inventive concept, if more than one is, in fact, disclosed. Thus, although specific embodiments have been illustrated and described herein, any arrangement calculated to achieve the same purpose may be substituted for the specific embodiments shown. This disclosure is intended to cover any and all adaptations or variations of various embodiments. Combinations of the above embodiments, and other embodiments not specifically described herein, will be apparent to those of skill in the art upon reviewing the above description.

Claims (21)

What is claimed is:
1. A phototherapy dressing system for treating a skin disorder by ultraviolet (UV) light therapy, the system comprising:
a frame configured to be worn on a patient's skin, the frame having a highly adhesive bottom surface configured for multi-day wear, the frame further forming an open window region, and the frame comprising one or more attachments configured to couple with a UV light source, wherein the frame is UV blocking; and
a patch configured to be adhesively and removably attached to cover the open window region of the frame, the patch further comprising a vapor occlusive barrier and a a coal tar, or a coal tar extract.
2. The system of claim 1, further comprising a hydrogel within the patch.
3. The system of claim 2, wherein the coal tar or the coal tar extract is within the hydrogel at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel.
4. The system of claim 2, wherein the patch further comprises a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the substrate.
5. The system of claim 1, further comprising a UV light source configured to magnetically couple to the plurality of attachments on the frame and deliver UV light through the window.
6. The system of claim 1, wherein the frame comprises polyurethane.
7. The system of claim 1, further comprising a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing.
8. The system of claim 1, further comprising a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing, wherein the unique identifier is one or more of: an RFID tag, an optical code, a magnetic signature, or an alphanumeric code, a capacitance signature and a resistive signature.
9. A phototherapy dressing system for treating a skin disorder by ultraviolet (UV) light therapy, the system comprising:
a frame configured to be worn on a patient's skin, the frame having a highly adhesive bottom surface configured for multi-day wear, the frame further forming an open window region through the frame, and the frame comprising one or more attachments, wherein the frame is UV blocking;
a patch configured to be removably attached to cover the open window region of the frame, the patch further comprising a vapor occlusive barrier and a coal tar or a coal tar extract; and
a UV light source configured to attach to the frame.
10. The system of claim 9, wherein the coal tar or the coal tar extract is within a hydrogel at between 0.025% and 5% (w/v) of the hydrogel.
11. The system of claim 10, wherein the patch further comprises a scrim layer coupling the hydrogel layer to the substrate.
12. The system of claim 9, wherein the frame comprises polyurethane.
13. The system of claim 9, further comprising a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing.
14. The system of claim 9, further comprising a unique identifier associated with the phototherapy dressing, wherein the unique identifier is one or more of: an RFID tag, an optical code, a magnetic signature, or an alphanumeric code, a capacitance signature and a resistive signature.
15. A method of delivering ultraviolet (UV) phototherapy to a patient to treat a skin disorder, the method comprising:
applying a frame to a patient's skin with an adhesive bottom configured for multi-day wear;
attaching a first patch to the frame over an open window on the frame, wherein the patch comprises a coal tar or coal tar extract;
wearing the patch so that the coal tar or coal tar extract contacts the skin;
removing the patch from the frame while the frame remains on the patient's skin;
attaching a UV light source to a plurality of attachment contacts on the frame to secure the UV lights source over the open window on the frame; and
delivering a therapeutic dose of UV light from the UV light source.
16. The method of claim 15, further comprising attaching a second patch over the open window on the frame.
17. The method of claim 15, wherein attaching the UV light source comprises magnetically attaching the UV light source.
18. The method of claim 15, further comprising identifying a unique identifier associated with the frame prior to delivering the therapeutic dose of UV light.
19. The method of claim 15, wherein attaching the first patch comprises adhesively attaching the first patch.
20. The method of claim 15, wherein delivering the therapeutic dose comprises blocking at least some of the applied UV light by the frame.
21. The method of claim 15, wherein attaching the first patch comprises adhesively attaching the first patch over the open window so that the first patch forms a vapor barrier relative to the patient's skin to reduce or prevent odor.
US16/264,444 2016-02-09 2019-01-31 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy Abandoned US20190240502A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/264,444 US20190240502A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2019-01-31 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201662293314P 2016-02-09 2016-02-09
US201662427654P 2016-11-29 2016-11-29
PCT/US2017/017271 WO2017139514A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-02-09 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy
US201816076709A 2018-08-09 2018-08-09
US16/264,444 US20190240502A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2019-01-31 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2017/017271 Continuation WO2017139514A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-02-09 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy
US16/076,709 Continuation US20190168016A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-02-09 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20190240502A1 true US20190240502A1 (en) 2019-08-08

Family

ID=59497314

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/429,139 Expired - Fee Related US9968800B2 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-02-09 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy
US16/076,709 Abandoned US20190168016A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-02-09 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy
US16/264,444 Abandoned US20190240502A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2019-01-31 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/429,139 Expired - Fee Related US9968800B2 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-02-09 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy
US16/076,709 Abandoned US20190168016A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-02-09 Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (3) US9968800B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3413852A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2019511343A (en)
KR (1) KR20180134856A (en)
CN (1) CN109310527A (en)
AU (1) AU2017217839A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2017139514A1 (en)

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11717326B2 (en) 2006-03-29 2023-08-08 Hydrafacial Llc Devices, systems and methods for treating the skin
US11744999B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2023-09-05 Hydra Facial LLC Devices and methods for treating the skin
US11806495B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2023-11-07 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for treating the skin
US11865287B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2024-01-09 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for treating skin
US11883621B2 (en) 2008-01-04 2024-01-30 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for skin treatment
US11903615B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2024-02-20 Hydrafacial Llc Devices, systems and methods for treating the skin
USD1016615S1 (en) 2021-09-10 2024-03-05 Hydrafacial Llc Container for a skin treatment device
US12005217B2 (en) 2008-01-29 2024-06-11 Hydrafacial Llc Devices, systems and methods for skin treatment
USD1042807S1 (en) 2021-10-11 2024-09-17 Hydrafacial Llc Skin treatment tip

Families Citing this family (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FI2800605T4 (en) 2012-01-03 2023-02-22 Phototherapeutic apparatus for focused uvb radiation and vitamin d synthesis and associated systems
US10596388B2 (en) * 2016-09-21 2020-03-24 Epistar Corporation Therapeutic light-emitting module
US10378953B2 (en) * 2017-06-01 2019-08-13 Youv Labs, Inc. Methods for guiding personal limit selection in UV dosimetry
US11311744B2 (en) * 2017-12-15 2022-04-26 Benesol, Inc. Dynamic dosing systems for phototherapy and associated devices, systems, and methods
WO2019222605A1 (en) * 2018-05-18 2019-11-21 Northwestern University Devices and methods for light delivery
US10568907B1 (en) * 2018-10-09 2020-02-25 Carol J. Buck Methods of treating basal cell carcinoma and glioblastoma
CN112997054A (en) 2018-10-19 2021-06-18 优夫实验室公司 Method, system and apparatus for accurate measurement of health-related UV illumination from sunlight
WO2020097602A1 (en) * 2018-11-09 2020-05-14 The General Hospital Corporation System and method for low cost light therapy
DE102018128054A1 (en) * 2018-11-09 2020-05-14 Karl Otto Braun Gmbh & Co. Kg. Bandage print
KR102251046B1 (en) * 2019-03-14 2021-05-13 주식회사 파커스 Light care device
KR102381138B1 (en) * 2019-03-14 2022-04-01 (주)알록 Light care device
WO2020264577A1 (en) 2019-06-28 2020-12-30 The Procter & Gamble Company Synergistic anti-inflammatory compositions
CN113905715A (en) * 2019-06-28 2022-01-07 宝洁公司 Light enhancement processing method
KR102327827B1 (en) 2019-11-01 2021-11-18 한국과학기술연구원 Composition for improving psoriasis symptom comprising extract of Curcuma longa L and UV treatment
US11247067B2 (en) 2020-03-11 2022-02-15 Chine, Llc Apparatus and methods for phototherapy
EP4171755A1 (en) 2020-06-26 2023-05-03 The Procter & Gamble Company Synergistic anti-inflammatory compositions
US10952519B1 (en) 2020-07-16 2021-03-23 Elyse Enterprises LLC Virtual hub for three-step process for mimicking plastic surgery results
US10909879B1 (en) 2020-07-16 2021-02-02 Elyse Enterprises LLC Multilingual interface for three-step process for mimicking plastic surgery results
US11464997B2 (en) * 2020-07-18 2022-10-11 Konrad Jarausch Systems and methods for light generation and use thereof
KR102451304B1 (en) 2020-09-14 2022-10-07 한국과학기술연구원 Composition for improving psoriasis symptom comprising extract of Thalictrum squarrosum steph
KR102527907B1 (en) 2020-09-14 2023-05-03 한국과학기술연구원 Composition for improving psoriasis symptom comprising extract of Sphallerocaprus gracilis
KR102461001B1 (en) 2020-09-14 2022-11-01 한국과학기술연구원 Composition for improving psoriasis symptom comprising extract of Dianthus superbus L.
WO2022094145A1 (en) * 2020-10-29 2022-05-05 Symbiox, Inc. Illumination devices, systems and methods
US11701316B2 (en) 2020-12-18 2023-07-18 The Procter & Gamble Company Synergistic anti-inflammatory compositions
EP4267240A1 (en) * 2020-12-23 2023-11-01 UAB Emplastrum Skin treatment module and system
KR102692893B1 (en) 2021-09-17 2024-08-08 한국과학기술연구원 Composition for improving psoriasis symptom comprising cimicifugolide A
KR20230041255A (en) 2021-09-17 2023-03-24 한국과학기술연구원 Composition for improving psoriasis symptom comprising extract of Aruncus dioicus var. kamtschaticus
CN114209987B (en) * 2021-12-07 2024-03-22 固安翌光科技有限公司 Flexible phototherapy device
CN113975653B (en) * 2021-12-08 2024-01-26 固安翌光科技有限公司 Phototherapy device for alleviating vitiligo symptoms
IT202200009212A1 (en) * 2022-05-05 2023-11-05 Giuliani Spa COMPOSITION FOR TOPICAL APPLICATION FOR THE PHOTOTHERAPY TREATMENT OF INFLAMMATORY-BASED SKIN DISEASES
CN117582609B (en) * 2024-01-18 2024-03-29 中国人民解放军总医院第一医学中心 Ultraviolet phototherapy system and application method thereof

Citations (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4909244A (en) * 1986-11-26 1990-03-20 The Kendall Company Hydrogel wound dressing
US20050089551A1 (en) * 2003-10-22 2005-04-28 Recupero Elizabeth A. Clotting agent-containing window dressing
US20050107732A1 (en) * 2003-10-14 2005-05-19 Boyde Sandra M. Wound dressing retainer and fastening device
US20060029657A1 (en) * 2004-03-26 2006-02-09 Stiefel Laboratories, Inc. Topical skin protectant compositions
US20070142761A1 (en) * 2005-12-15 2007-06-21 Adel Aali Wound shield
US20120078153A1 (en) * 2010-08-26 2012-03-29 Malcolm Russell Wound dressings
US20120191035A1 (en) * 2011-01-20 2012-07-26 Scott Stephan Therapeutic Treatment Pad
US20120238932A1 (en) * 2009-12-03 2012-09-20 Pharmaplast Sae Wound dressing, and method and production line of producing the wound dressing
US20120265120A1 (en) * 2011-04-15 2012-10-18 Beisang Iii Art Systems and methods for reducing the proliferation of microorganisms
US20120296260A1 (en) * 2009-06-09 2012-11-22 Freimut Vizethum Device and method for photodynamic therapy
US20130035629A1 (en) * 2011-08-04 2013-02-07 Conversion Energy Enterprises Optical bandage to sterilize wounds
US20130131621A1 (en) * 2011-11-17 2013-05-23 Robert W. Van Holten Dressing device
US20130178919A1 (en) * 2010-07-22 2013-07-11 Andrew McNeill Disposable skin care device
US8784384B2 (en) * 2008-10-31 2014-07-22 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Frozen compositions and array devices thereof
US20150174304A1 (en) * 2012-03-12 2015-06-25 Smith & Nephew, Plc Reduced pressure apparatus and methods
US20150238744A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2015-08-27 Hallux, Inc. Method of treating infections, diseases or disorders of nail unit
US20150238774A1 (en) * 2014-02-26 2015-08-27 Illumicure Inc. Phototherapy dressing for treating psoriasis
US20160015734A1 (en) * 2013-02-11 2016-01-21 Glycanova As Basidiomycete-Derived Cream for Treatment of Skin Diseases

Family Cites Families (174)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2999811A (en) 1957-08-07 1961-09-12 Amchem Prod Inhibitor composition
US3043745A (en) * 1959-12-11 1962-07-10 Reed & Carnick Allantoin and coal tar extract composition and treatment of psoriasis
US4102995A (en) 1976-05-13 1978-07-25 Westwood Pharmaceuticals Inc. Tar gel formulation
US4309007A (en) 1980-05-27 1982-01-05 The Logsdon Foundation Sound insulating support for plumbing pipes
US4341783A (en) 1980-07-31 1982-07-27 Lemmon Company Topical use of dyphylline and dyphylline containing compositions
US4440777A (en) 1981-07-07 1984-04-03 Merck & Co., Inc. Use of eucalyptol for enhancing skin permeation of bio-affecting agents
GB2181833A (en) 1985-09-13 1987-04-29 Radtech Inc Computing device for suntanning dose measurement, and process for producing optical filters
DK157899C (en) 1987-12-15 1990-09-03 Coloplast As A dressing
US5300097A (en) 1991-02-13 1994-04-05 Lerner Ethan A Fiber optic psoriasis treatment device
US5658956A (en) 1991-03-01 1997-08-19 Warner-Lambert Company Bioadhesive-wound healing compositions and methods for preparing and using same
GB9106365D0 (en) 1991-03-26 1991-05-15 Bioglan Lab Ltd An emollient for use with ultraviolet light
JP3115625B2 (en) 1991-03-30 2000-12-11 帝國製薬株式会社 Topical patch containing lidocaine
DK122791D0 (en) 1991-06-24 1991-06-24 Coloplast As wound dressing
WO1993007874A1 (en) 1991-10-26 1993-04-29 Ian Flockhart Medicament composition for topical application
US5419913A (en) 1992-03-05 1995-05-30 Podell; Howard I. Adhesive bandages, wound dressings, sutures, drapes, orthodontic rubber bands, toothbrushes, and the like
US5695456A (en) 1992-04-02 1997-12-09 Ndm, Inc. Wound packing and package therefor
US5393798A (en) 1992-06-05 1995-02-28 Spenco Medical Corporation Hydrogel material and method of preparation
US5460620A (en) 1992-07-31 1995-10-24 Creative Products Resource, Inc. Method of applying in-tandem applicator pads for transdermal delivery of a therapeutic agent
DE4328217C2 (en) 1993-08-21 1996-01-11 Lohmann Therapie Syst Lts Therapeutic system for the treatment of psoriasis
US5474528A (en) 1994-03-21 1995-12-12 Dusa Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combination controller and patch for the photodynamic therapy of dermal lesion
ATE215839T1 (en) 1994-03-21 2002-04-15 Dusa Pharmaceuticals Inc PLASTER AND CONTROL DEVICE FOR PHOTODYNAMIC THERAPY OF DERMAL INJURIES
US5505726A (en) 1994-03-21 1996-04-09 Dusa Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Article of manufacture for the photodynamic therapy of dermal lesion
US5616140A (en) 1994-03-21 1997-04-01 Prescott; Marvin Method and apparatus for therapeutic laser treatment
US5989245A (en) 1994-03-21 1999-11-23 Prescott; Marvin A. Method and apparatus for therapeutic laser treatment
US20030114902A1 (en) 1994-03-21 2003-06-19 Prescott Marvin A. Laser therapy for foot conditions
CA2184316A1 (en) 1995-09-12 1997-03-13 Wei-Chi Liao Buccal delivery system for therapeutic agents
US5836999A (en) 1995-09-28 1998-11-17 Esc Medical Systems Ltd. Method and apparatus for treating psoriasis using pulsed electromagnetic radiation
US6086903A (en) 1996-02-26 2000-07-11 The Proctor & Gamble Company Personal treatment compositions and/or cosmetic compositions containing enduring perfume
US5955067A (en) 1996-07-23 1999-09-21 Oge; Eray Potassium-containing composition useful in the treatment of acne, psoriasis and seborrhea
US5913883A (en) 1996-08-06 1999-06-22 Alexander; Dane Therapeutic facial mask
WO1998017215A1 (en) 1996-10-24 1998-04-30 Tyco Group S.A.R.L. Hydrogel wound dressing and the method of making and using the same
US6050990A (en) 1996-12-05 2000-04-18 Thermolase Corporation Methods and devices for inhibiting hair growth and related skin treatments
US5958420A (en) 1997-03-13 1999-09-28 Nortrade Medical, Inc. Treatment of burns, cuts, and abrasions of the skin
US6045575A (en) 1997-09-10 2000-04-04 Amt, Inc. Therapeutic method and internally illuminated garment for the management of disorders treatable by phototherapy
EP1026999B1 (en) 1997-10-08 2006-06-07 The General Hospital Corporation Phototherapy systems
US5879292A (en) 1997-10-09 1999-03-09 Edward A. Sternberg Bandage including data acquisition components
US5886038A (en) * 1998-03-24 1999-03-23 Panda Pharmaceuticals, L.L.C. Composition and method for treatment of psoriasis
RU2145247C1 (en) 1998-04-10 2000-02-10 Жаров Владимир Павлович Photomatrix therapeutic device for treatment of extended pathologies
US6223071B1 (en) 1998-05-01 2001-04-24 Dusa Pharmaceuticals Inc. Illuminator for photodynamic therapy and diagnosis which produces substantially uniform intensity visible light
US6096066A (en) 1998-09-11 2000-08-01 Light Sciences Limited Partnership Conformal patch for administering light therapy to subcutaneous tumors
US6219575B1 (en) 1998-10-23 2001-04-17 Babak Nemati Method and apparatus to enhance optical transparency of biological tissues
US6663659B2 (en) 2000-01-13 2003-12-16 Mcdaniel David H. Method and apparatus for the photomodulation of living cells
US6454789B1 (en) 1999-01-15 2002-09-24 Light Science Corporation Patient portable device for photodynamic therapy
US6632451B2 (en) 1999-06-04 2003-10-14 Dexcel Pharma Technologies Ltd. Delayed total release two pulse gastrointestinal drug delivery system
US6290713B1 (en) 1999-08-24 2001-09-18 Thomas A. Russell Flexible illuminators for phototherapy
US20030104080A1 (en) 1999-09-07 2003-06-05 Singh Parashu Ram Topical urea composition
JP4774179B2 (en) 1999-12-27 2011-09-14 帝國製薬株式会社 External patch
US6566575B1 (en) 2000-02-15 2003-05-20 3M Innovative Properties Company Patterned absorbent article for wound dressing
US6485740B1 (en) 2000-03-14 2002-11-26 Yutoku Pharmaceutical Ind., Co., Ltd. Transdermal methotrexate preparations
US8512718B2 (en) 2000-07-03 2013-08-20 Foamix Ltd. Pharmaceutical composition for topical application
WO2002055149A2 (en) 2000-10-20 2002-07-18 Photomedex Controlled dose delivery of ultraviolet light for treating skin disorders
AU2002243505A1 (en) 2001-01-11 2002-07-24 North American Sterilization And Packaging Company A hydrogel/hydrocolloid composite
US7192615B2 (en) 2001-02-28 2007-03-20 J&J Consumer Companies, Inc. Compositions containing legume products
DE60238677D1 (en) 2001-06-15 2011-02-03 Uv Solutions Llc Method for determining the permeability of a dressing
ITFI20010172A1 (en) 2001-09-17 2003-03-17 El En Spa APPARATUS WITH SPECTRUM LAMP IN THE ULTRAVIOLET, FOR THE TREATMENT OF PSORIASIS
GB2382305B (en) 2001-11-23 2004-12-15 Johnson & Johnson Medical Ltd Absorbent wound dressings containing a hydrogel layer
US7177695B2 (en) 2001-12-17 2007-02-13 Cefamoptec Industries, Inc. Early stage wound healing using electromagnetic radiation
US6960201B2 (en) 2002-02-11 2005-11-01 Quanticum, Llc Method for the prevention and treatment of skin and nail infections
US20050177093A1 (en) 2002-03-04 2005-08-11 Barry Hart M. Joint / tissue inflammation therapy and monitoring device
US20030180347A1 (en) 2002-03-19 2003-09-25 W.F. Young, Incorporated Patch for the delivery of topical agents
US6955684B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2005-10-18 Savage Jr Henry C Portable light delivery apparatus and methods
AU2003267892A1 (en) 2002-05-08 2003-11-11 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Nanotube mat with an array of conduits
AU2003251874A1 (en) 2002-07-12 2004-02-02 Dirk R. Albrecht Three dimensional cell patterned bioploymer scaffolds and method of making the same
US20040034397A1 (en) 2002-08-14 2004-02-19 Lin J. T. Method and apparatus for treating skin disorders using a short pulsed incoherent light
US20070219604A1 (en) 2006-03-20 2007-09-20 Palomar Medical Technologies, Inc. Treatment of tissue with radiant energy
US20080206161A1 (en) * 2002-10-25 2008-08-28 Dov Tamarkin Quiescent foamable compositions, steroids, kits and uses thereof
AU2003296475A1 (en) 2002-12-10 2004-06-30 University Of Florida Phototherapy bandage
US7267673B2 (en) 2002-12-12 2007-09-11 Pacific Biosciences Laboratories, Inc. System for treatment of acne skin condition using a narrow band light source
DE10260872B4 (en) 2002-12-23 2013-09-26 Beiersdorf Ag Use of gelling polymer, water, alcohol and seaweed extract for adjusting the elasticity and adhesion of self-adhesive cosmetic polymer matrices
US7887842B2 (en) 2003-02-07 2011-02-15 Teikoku Pharma Usa, Inc. Methods of administering a dermatological agent to a subject
WO2004078034A2 (en) 2003-03-04 2004-09-16 Spectragenics, Inc. Method and apparatus for the repigmentation of human skin
JP4435149B2 (en) 2003-03-06 2010-03-17 トリア ビューティ インコーポレイテッド Skin contact sensing device
EP1601388B1 (en) 2003-03-10 2011-04-27 Johnson & Johnson Medical Ltd. Hydrocolloid materials for use in wound healing
DE10310913B4 (en) 2003-03-13 2009-10-22 Ockenfels, Hans Michael, Priv.-Doz. Dr. med. Laser therapy system for the treatment of skin diseases
US20040186082A1 (en) 2003-03-20 2004-09-23 Hartman Raymond A. Enhanced phototherapy for the treatment of cancer and autoimmune disease
US7477938B2 (en) * 2003-06-30 2009-01-13 Johnson & Johnson Cosumer Companies, Inc. Device for delivery of active agents to barrier membranes
US7507228B2 (en) 2003-06-30 2009-03-24 Johnson & Johnson Consumer Companies, Inc. Device containing a light emitting diode for treatment of barrier membranes
US8128672B2 (en) 2006-05-09 2012-03-06 Thermotek, Inc. Wound care method and system with one or both of vacuum-light therapy and thermally augmented oxygenation
NL1024115C2 (en) 2003-08-15 2004-10-01 P J M J Beheer B V Device is for coupling endoscope to mobile picture telephone and is recorded by a camera contained in housing of telephone
US20050143268A1 (en) 2003-11-14 2005-06-30 The Procter & Gamble Company Personal care composition containing a cleansing phase and a benefit phase
US7052167B2 (en) 2004-02-25 2006-05-30 Vanderschuit Carl R Therapeutic devices and methods for applying therapy
WO2005086846A2 (en) 2004-03-09 2005-09-22 Ledeep, Llc Phototherapy systems and methods
US7183057B2 (en) 2004-03-31 2007-02-27 Dermtech International Tape stripping methods for analysis of skin disease and pathological skin state
US20080039907A1 (en) 2004-04-12 2008-02-14 Ledeep, Llc Phototherapy Systems and Methods
BRPI0510691A (en) 2004-05-04 2007-12-26 Genaissance Pharmaceuticals haplotype markers and methods of using them to determine response to treatment
EP1781329B1 (en) 2004-08-06 2013-07-31 Syneron Beauty Ltd. Therapy device
WO2006016364A2 (en) 2004-08-10 2006-02-16 Hellman De Picciotto, Tania Drug delivery devices
US7740875B2 (en) 2004-10-08 2010-06-22 Mediquest Therapeutics, Inc. Organo-gel formulations for therapeutic applications
WO2006049442A1 (en) 2004-11-03 2006-05-11 Forhumantech. Co., Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions for transdermal delivery
CA2591092A1 (en) 2004-12-17 2006-06-22 Alza Corporation Temperature modulation of transdermal drug delivery
US8109981B2 (en) * 2005-01-25 2012-02-07 Valam Corporation Optical therapies and devices
US20060173514A1 (en) * 2005-02-02 2006-08-03 Advanced Photodynamic Technologies, Inc. Wound treatment device for photodynamic therapy and method of using same
US20060183516A1 (en) 2005-02-16 2006-08-17 Ham Byung I Light therapy element incorporated mobile communication device
WO2006096360A1 (en) 2005-03-03 2006-09-14 Isw Group, Inc. Topical gels compositions
JP4999279B2 (en) 2005-03-09 2012-08-15 スカラ株式会社 Enlargement attachment
US20060206171A1 (en) 2005-03-14 2006-09-14 Michael Gertner Devices, methods and kits for radiation treatment via a target body surface
JP2006300981A (en) 2005-04-15 2006-11-02 Seiko Epson Corp Optical scanner, method of controlling optical scanner, and image display device
US20070032844A1 (en) 2005-08-05 2007-02-08 Levatter Jeffrey I Targeted UV phototherapy light block
US20070208395A1 (en) * 2005-10-05 2007-09-06 Leclerc Norbert H Phototherapy Device and Method of Providing Phototherapy to a Body Surface
US20090222069A1 (en) 2005-11-16 2009-09-03 Aalborg Universitet Light modulation of cell function
FR2895900B1 (en) 2006-01-09 2008-02-15 Alain Cornil SYSTEM FOR THE TREATMENT OF SKIN WOUNDS, DRESSING AND BIOCHEMICAL ACTIVATION EQUIPMENT FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF SUCH A SYSTEM
US20070173912A1 (en) 2006-01-20 2007-07-26 Somnuk Amornsiripanitch Phototherapy with specific infrared light for treating skin disorders
CA2535276A1 (en) 2006-02-06 2007-08-06 John Kennedy Therapy device and system and method for reducing harmful exposure to electromagnetic radiation
WO2007103687A2 (en) 2006-03-01 2007-09-13 Tristrata, Inc. Composition and method for topical treatment of tar-responsive dermatological disorders
US8888684B2 (en) 2006-03-27 2014-11-18 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Medical devices with local drug delivery capabilities
US20070233208A1 (en) 2006-03-28 2007-10-04 Eastman Kodak Company Light therapy bandage with imbedded emitters
US20130274834A1 (en) 2006-04-18 2013-10-17 Daniel Barolet Method for the treatment of skin tissues.
US20090112192A1 (en) 2006-04-18 2009-04-30 Daniel Barolet Method for the Treatment of Skin Tissues
US20070259029A1 (en) * 2006-05-08 2007-11-08 Mcentire Edward Enns Water-dispersible patch containing an active agent for dermal delivery
WO2008011625A2 (en) 2006-07-21 2008-01-24 Georgia Tech Researh Corporation Microneedle devices and methods of drug delivery or fluid withdrawal
US20100010593A1 (en) 2006-08-07 2010-01-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. System of plaster and radiation device
US20080038219A1 (en) 2006-08-07 2008-02-14 Calgenex Corporation Novel Composition for a Topical Skin Treatment Base and Medicated Applications Thereof
EP1891995A1 (en) 2006-08-08 2008-02-27 Debiotech S.A. Drug loading of porous coating
US20080172046A1 (en) 2006-08-23 2008-07-17 Zimmer J Peter Pulsed UV Laser Treatment of Recurring Skin Disorders
US20080058907A1 (en) 2006-08-30 2008-03-06 Reuben David I Self Sanitizing Bandage with Built-In Ultraviolet LED
US20080103560A1 (en) 2006-10-26 2008-05-01 Lumiport, Llc Ultraviolet indicator light therapy device
WO2008131343A1 (en) 2007-04-19 2008-10-30 Mergenet Medical, Inc. Temporal control in phototherapy
EP2142254A4 (en) 2007-05-02 2011-01-26 Univ Rochester Feedback-controlled method for delivering photodynamic therapy and related instrumentation
US20090105791A1 (en) 2007-10-23 2009-04-23 Mcginnis William J Light emitting medical garment device, kit and method of using
CN101918375A (en) 2007-11-06 2010-12-15 密歇根大学董事会 Benzodiazepinone compounds useful in the treatment of skin conditions
WO2009066294A1 (en) 2007-11-20 2009-05-28 Hy Biopharma Inc. Device and method for photodynamic therapy
KR101511405B1 (en) 2008-02-25 2015-04-15 데이고꾸세이약꾸가부시끼가이샤 Wound-covering hydrogel material
US20100286673A1 (en) 2008-03-17 2010-11-11 Palomar Medical Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for treatment of tissue
US8795259B2 (en) 2008-08-01 2014-08-05 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Drug delivery platform incorporating hydrogel pumping mechanism with guided fluid flow
TW201008605A (en) 2008-08-19 2010-03-01 Advanced Optoelectronic Tech Medical light device
EP2175398B1 (en) 2008-10-08 2011-12-14 Paul Hartmann Aktiengesellschaft Medical product
GB0821862D0 (en) 2008-12-01 2009-01-07 Lumicure Ltd Light Emitting apparatus
US8760295B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2014-06-24 Avery Dennison Corporation Apparatus and methods for treating a wound
GB0901456D0 (en) 2009-01-29 2009-03-11 Insense Ltd Treatment of psoriasis
US20110002918A1 (en) 2009-03-06 2011-01-06 Photomedex Methods of treating diseased tissue
US8399731B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2013-03-19 Covidien Lp Phototherapy wound treatment
US8303982B2 (en) 2009-03-20 2012-11-06 Ethicon, Inc Self-locating, multiple application, and multiple location medical patch systems and methods therefor
US20120101557A1 (en) 2009-06-24 2012-04-26 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Treatment apparatus and use thereof for treating psoriasis
BRPI1011746A2 (en) * 2009-06-25 2018-02-06 3M Innovative Properties Co light-activated antimicrobial articles and methods of use
GB0911740D0 (en) 2009-07-07 2009-08-19 Lumicure Ltd Improved medical apparatus
AU2010278702C1 (en) 2009-07-31 2016-07-14 Forsyth Dental Infirmary For Children Programming of cells for tolerogenic therapies
WO2012010238A1 (en) 2010-07-17 2012-01-26 Merck Patent Gmbh Enhancement of penetration and action
WO2012011042A2 (en) 2010-07-22 2012-01-26 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Improvements in phototherapy
WO2012023086A1 (en) 2010-08-17 2012-02-23 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Flexible light therapy device, a plaster and a bandage
EP2422844A1 (en) 2010-08-24 2012-02-29 Polyphotonix Limited Wearable phototherapy device
US20120088693A1 (en) 2010-09-10 2012-04-12 Moo-Yeal Lee Microarray cell chip
US9033962B2 (en) 2010-09-16 2015-05-19 Case Western Reserve University Photodynamic therapy including light pretreatment
US20120109042A1 (en) * 2010-10-28 2012-05-03 John Koo Methods of Treating Diseased Tissue
US20120245422A1 (en) 2011-03-21 2012-09-27 Hasbun William M Otoscope attachment to be used in conjunction with a smart phone and a method for its use
EP2508229A1 (en) 2011-04-07 2012-10-10 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Method and device for biostimulating irradiation
CA2827124C (en) 2011-04-12 2019-03-12 Kci Licensing, Inc. Evaporative fluid pouch and systems for use with body fluids
US20120289885A1 (en) 2011-05-14 2012-11-15 William Jude Cottrell Phototherapy system
WO2012177544A1 (en) 2011-06-18 2012-12-27 Intuitive Medical Technologies, Llc Smart-phone adapter for ophthalmoscope
WO2013028833A1 (en) 2011-08-23 2013-02-28 Anthony Natale Systems and methods for treating pathogenic infection
US20130096029A1 (en) 2011-09-06 2013-04-18 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Multiplexed in vivo screening of biological samples
US10090694B2 (en) 2011-09-08 2018-10-02 Johnson & Johnson Consumer Inc. Light therapy platform mobile phone charger
US10022554B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2018-07-17 Johnson & Johnson Consumer Inc. Light therapy bandage system
US20150005595A1 (en) 2011-12-30 2015-01-01 Kibur Medical, Inc. Implantable devices and methods for evaluation of active agents
FI2800605T4 (en) 2012-01-03 2023-02-22 Phototherapeutic apparatus for focused uvb radiation and vitamin d synthesis and associated systems
JP6007313B2 (en) 2012-04-19 2016-10-12 バイオルックス リサーチ リミテッド Intraoral phototherapy device
CN104619380B (en) 2012-09-04 2017-06-16 皇家飞利浦有限公司 The system and method for baby is optionally illuminated during phototherapy
JP5909167B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2016-04-26 株式会社日立製作所 Radiation therapy planning device
US20140081360A1 (en) 2012-09-20 2014-03-20 Photopill Medical Ltd. Capsule phototherapy
GB201301958D0 (en) 2013-02-04 2013-03-20 Polyphotonix Ltd Medical apparatus,system and method
EP3446743B1 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-10-14 Carewear Corp. Ultrasonic transducer device
CA2902396A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Smith & Nephew Plc Wound dressing sealant and use thereof
US20140276359A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Plum Systems Co. Apparatus and method for tissue rejuvenation
KR20150133800A (en) 2013-03-21 2015-11-30 더마 드림 그룹 엘티디. Displacement-based control of a skin treatment device
US20140356295A1 (en) 2013-06-03 2014-12-04 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Cosmetic compositions comprising tobacco seed-derived component
BR112015031320B1 (en) 2013-06-13 2022-01-18 Aspect Biosystems Ltd SYSTEM FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL STRUCTURES AND PRINTING METHOD OF A THREE-DIMENSIONAL STRUCTURE
MY184693A (en) 2013-08-22 2021-04-17 Univ Kebangsaan Malaysia Ukm Bilayer hydrocolloid films containing therapeutic agents
EP3060301B1 (en) 2013-10-25 2018-12-19 BeneSol, Inc. Systems and methods for increased vitamin d3 production
US9913993B2 (en) 2014-02-03 2018-03-13 Clarify Medical, Inc. Systems and methods for phototherapy
JP2015164511A (en) 2014-02-07 2015-09-17 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 Hair growth inhibition apparatus and hair growth inhibition method
EP4219679A3 (en) 2014-04-15 2023-08-09 Aobiome LLC Ammonia-oxidizing nitrosomonas eutropha strain d23
JP6770774B2 (en) 2014-12-09 2020-10-21 ラトガース,ザ ステート ユニバーシティ オブ ニュージャージー 3D scaffolding for bone regeneration
US10631766B2 (en) 2015-03-05 2020-04-28 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Devices and systems for optically determining a concentration of an analyte in a living subject using hydrogel-based, fluorescent microneedles and methods of manufacture thereof
AU2016245001B2 (en) 2015-04-10 2020-09-03 Zerigo Health, Inc. Phototherapy light engine
US20160361015A1 (en) 2015-06-15 2016-12-15 Mc10, Inc. Moisture wicking adhesives for skin-mounted devices

Patent Citations (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4909244A (en) * 1986-11-26 1990-03-20 The Kendall Company Hydrogel wound dressing
US4909244B1 (en) * 1986-11-26 1994-07-05 Kendall & Co Hydrogel wound dressing
US20050107732A1 (en) * 2003-10-14 2005-05-19 Boyde Sandra M. Wound dressing retainer and fastening device
US20050089551A1 (en) * 2003-10-22 2005-04-28 Recupero Elizabeth A. Clotting agent-containing window dressing
US20060029657A1 (en) * 2004-03-26 2006-02-09 Stiefel Laboratories, Inc. Topical skin protectant compositions
US20070142761A1 (en) * 2005-12-15 2007-06-21 Adel Aali Wound shield
US8784384B2 (en) * 2008-10-31 2014-07-22 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Frozen compositions and array devices thereof
US20120296260A1 (en) * 2009-06-09 2012-11-22 Freimut Vizethum Device and method for photodynamic therapy
US20120238932A1 (en) * 2009-12-03 2012-09-20 Pharmaplast Sae Wound dressing, and method and production line of producing the wound dressing
US20130178919A1 (en) * 2010-07-22 2013-07-11 Andrew McNeill Disposable skin care device
US20120078153A1 (en) * 2010-08-26 2012-03-29 Malcolm Russell Wound dressings
US20120191035A1 (en) * 2011-01-20 2012-07-26 Scott Stephan Therapeutic Treatment Pad
US20120265120A1 (en) * 2011-04-15 2012-10-18 Beisang Iii Art Systems and methods for reducing the proliferation of microorganisms
US20130035629A1 (en) * 2011-08-04 2013-02-07 Conversion Energy Enterprises Optical bandage to sterilize wounds
US20130131621A1 (en) * 2011-11-17 2013-05-23 Robert W. Van Holten Dressing device
US20150174304A1 (en) * 2012-03-12 2015-06-25 Smith & Nephew, Plc Reduced pressure apparatus and methods
US20160015734A1 (en) * 2013-02-11 2016-01-21 Glycanova As Basidiomycete-Derived Cream for Treatment of Skin Diseases
US20150238744A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2015-08-27 Hallux, Inc. Method of treating infections, diseases or disorders of nail unit
US20150238774A1 (en) * 2014-02-26 2015-08-27 Illumicure Inc. Phototherapy dressing for treating psoriasis

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11865287B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2024-01-09 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for treating skin
US12053607B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2024-08-06 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for treating skin
US11717326B2 (en) 2006-03-29 2023-08-08 Hydrafacial Llc Devices, systems and methods for treating the skin
US11883621B2 (en) 2008-01-04 2024-01-30 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for skin treatment
US12005217B2 (en) 2008-01-29 2024-06-11 Hydrafacial Llc Devices, systems and methods for skin treatment
US11903615B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2024-02-20 Hydrafacial Llc Devices, systems and methods for treating the skin
US11744999B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2023-09-05 Hydra Facial LLC Devices and methods for treating the skin
US11806495B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2023-11-07 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for treating the skin
US11925780B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2024-03-12 Hydrafacial Llc Devices and methods for treating the skin
USD1016615S1 (en) 2021-09-10 2024-03-05 Hydrafacial Llc Container for a skin treatment device
USD1042807S1 (en) 2021-10-11 2024-09-17 Hydrafacial Llc Skin treatment tip

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN109310527A (en) 2019-02-05
EP3413852A1 (en) 2018-12-19
KR20180134856A (en) 2018-12-19
EP3413852A4 (en) 2019-07-31
US20170225006A1 (en) 2017-08-10
WO2017139514A1 (en) 2017-08-17
US9968800B2 (en) 2018-05-15
AU2017217839A1 (en) 2018-08-23
JP2019511343A (en) 2019-04-25
US20190168016A1 (en) 2019-06-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9968800B2 (en) Methods, compositions and apparatuses for treating psoriasis by phototherapy
AU2021107564A4 (en) Methods for photodynamic therapy
JP6608382B2 (en) Ultraviolet light treatment apparatus and method
KR101492793B1 (en) Skin care device by light irradiation capable of real time observation of the skin
EP0841965B1 (en) Patch and controller for the photodynamic therapy of a dermal lesion
US5474528A (en) Combination controller and patch for the photodynamic therapy of dermal lesion
PT1213037E (en) Methods for facilitated non-invasive oxygen monitoring
DE50311477D1 (en) HORMONOUS TRANSDERMAL THERAPEUTIC SYSTEM WITH AN ACTIVE SUBSTANCE ON THE BASIS OF VINYL ACETATE VINYLPYRROLIDONE COPOLYMER WITH IMPROVED COHESION.
Von Dobbeler et al. PDT with PPIX absorption peaks adjusted wavelengths: Safety and efficacy of a new irradiation procedure for actinic keratoses on the head
ES2608353T3 (en) Non-therapeutic non-acne oily skin treatment procedure
CA2837505C (en) Layer structure for epidermal radionuclide therapy
KR101583449B1 (en) Cosmetic utensil for neck
Smith General principles of laser therapy
TWM480361U (en) Hydrogel patch for joints
KR20210097326A (en) the drug delivery system using near infrared ray
KR20130141279A (en) Transdermal patch for supplying physiological active substance through skin
TWM495835U (en) Hydrogel patch for oxters

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION